WO2024080128A1 - Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern-forming method, and electronic device production method - Google Patents

Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern-forming method, and electronic device production method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024080128A1
WO2024080128A1 PCT/JP2023/034808 JP2023034808W WO2024080128A1 WO 2024080128 A1 WO2024080128 A1 WO 2024080128A1 JP 2023034808 W JP2023034808 W JP 2023034808W WO 2024080128 A1 WO2024080128 A1 WO 2024080128A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
anion
acid
carbon atoms
cation
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/034808
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
朝日 ▲高▼木
直紘 丹呉
和博 丸茂
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2024080128A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024080128A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D307/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D317/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D317/08Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the hetero atoms in positions 1 and 3
    • C07D317/72Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the hetero atoms in positions 1 and 3 spiro-condensed with carbocyclic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D333/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D333/50Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having one sulfur atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D333/76Dibenzothiophenes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an actinic ray- or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a resist film, a pattern forming method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device.
  • pattern formation methods using chemical amplification have been used to compensate for the loss of sensitivity due to light absorption.
  • Examples of pattern formation methods using chemical amplification include the following methods.
  • An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin film (hereinafter also referred to as a "resist film”) formed using an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter also referred to as a "resist composition”) containing a photoacid generator is exposed to light to generate an acid from the photoacid generator.
  • the acid is used as a catalyst to change the solubility of the resin contained in the resist composition in a developer (e.g., an alkaline aqueous solution or an organic solvent). Thereafter, the exposed or unexposed portion of the resist film is removed using the developer to obtain a desired pattern.
  • a developer e.g., an alkaline aqueous solution or an organic solvent.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a composition containing a quencher having a specific structure.
  • a resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid a photoacid generator which comprises an anion and a cation and generates an acid when exposed to actinic rays or radiation; a first acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation; a second acid diffusion control agent comprising a second anion and a second cation; an acid dissociation constant A of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation in the photoacid generator with a proton is smaller than both an acid dissociation constant B of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the first cation in the first acid diffusion controller with a proton and an acid dissociation constant C of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the second cation in the second acid diffusion controller with a proton; the first anion has a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or
  • an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a resist pattern with small LWR.
  • the present invention can also provide a resist film formed using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, as well as a pattern forming method and a device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • a numerical range expressed using “ ⁇ ” means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after " ⁇ " as the lower and upper limits.
  • the notation of groups (atomic groups) that does not indicate whether they are substituted or unsubstituted includes not only groups that have no substituents but also groups that have a substituent, unless it is contrary to the spirit of the present invention.
  • an "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group that has no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group that has a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • a monovalent substituent is preferred.
  • an "organic group” refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom. In this specification, the bonding direction of the divalent linking group is not limited unless otherwise specified.
  • Y when Y is -COO- in a compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z", Y may be -CO-O- or -O-CO-. That is, the compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
  • (meth)acrylate refers to acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth)acrylic refers to acrylic and methacrylic.
  • actinic rays or “radiation” refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light: extreme ultraviolet), X-rays, and electron beams (EB).
  • light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure includes not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV: extreme ultraviolet), X-rays, and the like, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
  • ppm means “parts-per-million (10 -6 )
  • ppb means “parts-per-billion (10 -9 )
  • ppt means “parts-per-trillion (10 -12 ).”
  • 1 ⁇ is equal to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 10 m.
  • weight average molecular weight (Mw), number average molecular weight (Mn), and polydispersity index (also referred to as "PDI") are defined as polystyrene equivalent values measured using a Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC) device (Tosoh Corporation HLC-8120GPC) (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection amount): 10 ⁇ L, column: Tosoh Corporation TSK gel Multipore HXL-M, column temperature: 40°C, flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, detector: differential refractive index detector).
  • GPC Gel Permeation Chromatography
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) refers to the pKa in an aqueous solution.
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • the pKa can be calculated, for example, by calculation based on the database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values, and by using molecular orbital calculation method.
  • Specific methods of molecular orbital calculation method include a method of calculating by calculating H + dissociation free energy in aqueous solution based on thermodynamic cycle.
  • the calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated, for example, by DFT (density functional theory), but there are various other methods reported in literature, etc., and it is not limited thereto.
  • pKa is a value calculated using the following software package 1 based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values.
  • the ClogP value is the value obtained by calculating the common logarithm logP of the partition coefficient P between 1-octanol and water. Any known method and software can be used to calculate the ClogP value, but unless otherwise specified, in this invention, the structure is drawn using ChemDraw Professional (version 20.1.1.125) manufactured by PerkinElmer, and the value calculated using the above software is used.
  • Solids refers to the components that form the resist film, and does not include solvents. In addition, if a component forms a resist film, it is considered to be a solid even if it is in liquid form.
  • acid diffusion control agent refers to a concept that includes a first acid diffusion control agent and a second acid diffusion control agent.
  • the resist composition of the present invention comprises: a resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid; a photoacid generator comprising an anion and a cation and generating an acid upon exposure to actinic rays or radiation; a first acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation; and a second acid diffusion controller comprising a second anion and a second cation; the acid dissociation constant A of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation in the photoacid generator with a proton is smaller than both of the acid dissociation constant B of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the first cation in the first acid diffusion controller with a proton and the acid dissociation constant C of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the second cation in the second acid diffusion controller with a proton; the first anion has a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a
  • the present inventors speculate as follows.
  • the mechanism by which the effects are obtained is not limited by the following speculation. In other words, even if the effects are obtained by a mechanism other than the following, it is included in the scope of the present invention.
  • pattern formation it is known that an acid generated from a photoacid generator by exposure reacts unintentionally with a resin in an unexposed area, which is one of the causes of an increase in LWR.
  • the resist composition of the present invention can effectively suppress the reaction between the acid and the resin in the unexposed area by containing the above-mentioned two specific acid diffusion control agents.
  • a first acid diffusion control agent having a small volume and a highly hydrophilic first anion moves to the boundary between the hydrophilic exposed area and the hydrophobic unexposed area to suppress acid diffusion
  • a second acid diffusion control agent having a large volume and a second anion that is difficult to move suppresses acid diffusion in the unexposed area outside the boundary.
  • the resist composition of the present invention contains a resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid (hereinafter, also referred to as a "specific resin”).
  • the specific resin preferably has a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to increase its polarity (hereinafter, also referred to as an "acid-decomposable group”), and more preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
  • an acid-decomposable group typically, in the pattern formation method of the present invention, when an alkaline developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed, and when an organic developer is used as the developer, a negative pattern is preferably formed.
  • the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group include a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group and a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond.
  • the specific resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
  • the acid-decomposable group refers to a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to generate a polar group.
  • the acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected by a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid (a leaving group).
  • the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit having a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to generate a polar group, and the resin having this repeating unit has increased polarity under the action of an acid, thereby increasing its solubility in an alkaline developer and decreasing its solubility in an organic solvent.
  • the polar group is preferably an alkali-soluble group, and examples thereof include acidic groups such as a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphate group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, an (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, an (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, a bis(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, a bis(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide group, a tris(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, and a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, as well as an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
  • acidic groups
  • the polar group is preferably a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group, and more preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • Examples of the leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid include groups represented by the formulae (Y1) to (Y4).
  • Formula (Y1) -C(Rx 1 )(Rx 2 )(Rx 3 )
  • Formula (Y3) -C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 38 )
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (linear or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched)
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each preferably independently represent an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and more preferably represent a linear alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • cycloalkyl group examples include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • the aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
  • the alkenyl group is preferably a vinyl group.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocycle or polycycle.
  • the ring formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group, more preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group, and more preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group, or a vinylidene group.
  • a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group
  • vinylidene group one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be substituted with a vinylene group.
  • Rx1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx2 and Rx3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
  • the resist composition is, for example, a resist composition for EUV exposure, it is also preferable that the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 and the rings formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 further have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
  • R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 37 and R 38 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group.
  • the preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and aralkyl group are the same as those of the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 above. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
  • one or more methylene groups may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, -SO 2 - group or -SO 3 - group.
  • R 38 may be bonded to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding R 38 to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
  • the groups represented by R 36 to R 38 and the ring formed by bonding R 37 and R 38 further have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
  • Ar represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rn and Ar may be bonded to each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
  • Ar is preferably an aryl group.
  • the preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group are the same as those of the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 above.
  • the group represented by Ar and the group represented by Rn each have a fluorine atom or iodine atom as a substituent.
  • the ring atom in the non-aromatic ring adjacent to the ring atom directly bonded to the polar group (or a residue thereof) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • the group that is eliminated by the action of an acid may be a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (such as an alkyl group), such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, or a cyclohexyl group having a substituent (such as an alkyl group), such as a 1,1,4,4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group.
  • the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (A).
  • L1 represents a divalent linking group
  • R1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • R2 represents a leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid.
  • L1 represents a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, divalent hydrocarbon groups (e.g., alkylene groups, cycloalkylene groups, alkenylene groups, arylene groups, etc.), and linking groups in which a plurality of these are linked together.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
  • L1 is preferably -CO-, -Rt-, -COO-Rt-, -COO-Rt-CO- or -Rt-CO-, and more preferably -CO- or -COO-Rt-CO-.
  • Rt is a divalent hydrocarbon group, preferably an alkylene group or an arylene group, and more preferably an alkylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms that the alkylene group may have is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 3 to 6.
  • the arylene group is preferably a phenylene group.
  • R1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl group and the aryl group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
  • the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms which the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom.
  • R2 represents a leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid.
  • the leaving group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
  • Examples of the leaving group include the leaving groups represented by the above formulae (Y1) to (Y4).
  • the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (AI).
  • Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Rx1 to Rx3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (linear or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (eg, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group).
  • Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group which may have a substituent include a methyl group or a group represented by -CH 2 -R 11.
  • R 11 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, an acyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom.
  • An alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferred, and a methyl group is more preferred.
  • Xa1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a hydroxymethyl group.
  • T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an aromatic ring group, -COO-Rt-, and -O-Rt-, where Rt represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group.
  • T is preferably a single bond or --COO--Rt--.
  • Rt is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, or a propylene group.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (straight-chain or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (straight-chain or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (eg, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group). Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group and aryl group represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 are the same as the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 in formulae (Y1) and (Y2).
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx1 to Rx3 is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group, or a vinylidene group.
  • a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group
  • vinylidene group a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group
  • one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be substituted with a vinylene group.
  • Rx1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group
  • Rx2 and Rx3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
  • the groups represented by Rx1 to Rx3 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the repeating unit represented by formula (AI) is preferably an acid-decomposable tertiary alkyl (meth)acrylate repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and T represents a single bond or -COO-Rt-).
  • repeating units having an acid-decomposable group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0053] to [0057] of WO 2020/158467.
  • the specific resin may have, as the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group, a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond.
  • a repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferred.
  • Xb represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group which may have a substituent.
  • Ry 1 to Ry 3 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic aryl group. However, at least one of Ry 1 to Ry 3 represents an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkenyl group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic aryl group. Two of Ry 1 to Ry 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (such as a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group).
  • Xb represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • the preferred embodiments of Xb are the same as those of Xa1 in formula (AI).
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group which may have a substituent.
  • the divalent linking group include a -Rt- group, a -CO- group, a -COO-Rt- group, a -COO-Rt-CO- group, a -Rt-CO- group, and a -O-Rt- group.
  • Rt represents an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or an aromatic ring group, and is preferably an aromatic ring group.
  • Rt may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
  • L is preferably a -Rt- group, a -CO- group, a -COO-Rt-CO- group, or a -Rt-CO- group.
  • Ry 1 to Ry 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkenyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), provided that at least one of Ry 1 to Ry 3 represents an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkenyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
  • Two of Ry 1 to Ry 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (such as a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group).
  • a monocyclic or polycyclic ring such as a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group.
  • Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group and aryl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 above are the same as the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 in formula (Y-1).
  • the alkynyl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 is preferably an ethynyl group.
  • cycloalkenyl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 a structure containing a double bond in a part of a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group is preferable.
  • the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group formed by combining two of Ry1 to Ry3 for example, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, an -SO2- group or an -SO3- group, a vinylidene group, or a combination thereof.
  • cycloalkyl groups or cycloalkenyl groups one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring or cycloalkene ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • R1 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, or an aryl group
  • Ry2 and Ry3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group.
  • the substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferably an acid-decomposable (meth)acrylic acid tertiary ester repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a -CO- group), an acid-decomposable hydroxystyrene tertiary alkyl ether repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a phenyl group), or an acid-decomposable styrene carboxylic acid tertiary ester repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a -Ar-CO- group (Ar is an aromatic group)).
  • an acid-decomposable (meth)acrylic acid tertiary ester repeating unit a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents
  • the content is preferably 15 to 80 mol %, more preferably 20 to 70 mol %, and even more preferably 30 to 60 mol %, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the content of the repeating units having an acid-decomposable group is preferably 15 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, and even more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, even more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the specific resin may contain at least one type of repeating unit selected from the group consisting of Group A below, and/or at least one type of repeating unit selected from the group consisting of Group B below.
  • Group A A group consisting of the following repeating units (20) to (25).
  • a repeating unit having an acid group as described below (21)
  • a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group as described below
  • a repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2), as described below Group B of repeating units for reducing mobility of the main chain: a group consisting of the following repeating units (30) to (32).
  • (32) A repeating unit represented by formula (III), as described below, which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • the specific resin preferably has an acid group, and preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the interaction between the specific resin and the acid generated from the photoacid generator is superior.
  • the diffusion of the acid is further suppressed, and the cross-sectional shape of the formed pattern can become more rectangular.
  • the specific resin When the resist composition is used for EUV exposure, the specific resin preferably has at least one type of repeating unit selected from Group A above. When the resist composition is used for EUV exposure, the specific resin also preferably contains a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, the specific resin preferably has one type of repeating unit selected from Group B above. When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, it is also preferable that the specific resin contains neither fluorine atoms nor silicon atoms. When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, it is also preferable that the specific resin does not contain an aromatic group.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit having an acid group.
  • the acid dissociation constant of the acid group is preferably 13 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more.
  • the content of the acid group in the specific resin is not particularly limited, but is often 0.2 to 6.0 mmol/g. Among them, 0.8 to 6.0 mmol/g is preferable, 1.2 to 5.0 mmol/g is more preferable, and 1.6 to 4.0 mmol/g is even more preferable. When the content of the acid group is within the above range, development proceeds well, and the formed pattern shape and resolution are more excellent.
  • the acid group is preferably, for example, a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, or an isopropanol group.
  • a fluorinated alcohol group preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group
  • a sulfonic acid group preferably a sulfonamide group
  • an isopropanol group preferably, for example, a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, or an isopropanol group.
  • hexafluoroisopropanol group one or more (preferably one or two) fluorine atoms may be substituted with
  • the repeating unit having an acid group preferably has a structure different from that of a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group and a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group, which will be described later.
  • the repeating unit having an acid group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (1):
  • A represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
  • R represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group.
  • R may be the same or different, and may form a ring together.
  • R is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • b represents an integer of 0 to (5-a).
  • repeating units having an acid group examples include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0081] to [0086] of WO 2020/158467.
  • the content of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 10 mol% or more, and more preferably 15 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 65 mol% or less, and even more preferably 60 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit X") that has neither an acid decomposable group nor an acid group and has a fluorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, which is different from the above-mentioned ⁇ repeating unit having an acid decomposable group> and ⁇ repeating unit having an acid group>.
  • unit X a repeating unit
  • the unit X is different from other types of repeating units belonging to group A, such as the ⁇ repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group or a carbonate group> and the ⁇ repeating unit having a photoacid generating group> described below.
  • the repeating unit X is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (C).
  • L5 represents a single bond or -COO-.
  • R9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or a group which combines these.
  • unit X examples include the repeating units described in paragraph [0093] of WO 2020/158467.
  • the content of unit X is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, and even more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, and even more preferably 40 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit Y") having at least one type selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group. It is also preferred that the unit Y does not have a hydroxyl group or an acid group such as a hexafluoropropanol group.
  • the lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or sultone structure.
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered sultone structure.
  • a 5- to 7-membered lactone structure having another ring structure condensed thereto in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure, or a 5- to 7-membered sultone structure having another ring structure condensed thereto in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure is more preferred.
  • the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit having a lactone group or sultone group obtained by removing one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom of a lactone structure represented by any one of the following formulae (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a sultone structure represented by any one of the following formulae (SL1-1) to (SL1-3), and the lactone group or sultone group may be directly bonded to the main chain.
  • the ring member atom of the lactone group or sultone group may constitute the main chain of the specific resin.
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure may have a substituent (Rb 2 ).
  • Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, and an acid-decomposable group.
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, the multiple Rb 2s may be different from each other, or the multiple Rb 2s may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • An example of a repeating unit having a group containing a lactone structure represented by any one of formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) or a sultone structure represented by any one of formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3) is a repeating unit represented by the following formula (AI).
  • Rb 0 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Preferred substituents that the alkyl group of Rb 0 may have include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. Rb0 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • Ab represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, or a divalent linking group combining these.
  • Ab is preferably a single bond or a linking group represented by -Ab 1 -CO 2 -.
  • Ab 1 is a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, and is preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, an adamantylene group, or a norbornylene group.
  • V represents a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom of a lactone structure represented by any of formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom of a sultone structure represented by any of formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3).
  • optical isomers exist in the repeating unit having a lactone group or a sultone group
  • any optical isomer may be used.
  • one optical isomer may be used alone, or multiple optical isomers may be used in combination.
  • the optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, and more preferably 95 or more.
  • the carbonate group is preferably a cyclic carbonate ester group.
  • the repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1).
  • R A 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic group (preferably a methyl group).
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • R A 2 represents a substituent. When n is 2 or more, a plurality of R A 2 may be the same or different.
  • A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, or a divalent linking group formed by combining these is preferable.
  • Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring together with the group represented by -O-CO-O- in the formula.
  • Rx represents a hydrogen atom, -CH3 , -CH2OH or CF3 .
  • the content of the unit Y is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, even more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the specific resin may contain, as a repeating unit other than the above, a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as a "photoacid generating group").
  • a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
  • R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L 42 represents a divalent linking group.
  • R 40 represents a structural moiety that is decomposed by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation to generate an acid in a side chain. Examples of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group are shown below.
  • repeating units having a photoacid generating group examples include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP2014-041327A and the repeating unit described in paragraph [0094] of WO2018/193954.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2).
  • the repeating units represented by the following formulae (V-1) and (V-2) are preferably repeating units different from the repeating units described above.
  • R6 and R7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR:
  • R is an alkyl group or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a carboxy group.
  • the alkyl group a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 to 6.
  • n4 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • X4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) include the repeating units described in paragraph [0100] of WO 2018/193954.
  • the specific resin preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) in order to suppress excessive diffusion of the generated acid or pattern collapse during development.
  • Tg is preferably higher than 90° C., more preferably higher than 100° C., even more preferably higher than 110° C., and particularly preferably 125° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit is preferably 400° C. or lower, more preferably 350° C. or lower, in order to provide an excellent dissolution rate in the developer.
  • the Tg of a polymer such as a specific resin is calculated by the following method. First, the Tg of a homopolymer consisting of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method.
  • the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to the total repeating units in the polymer is calculated.
  • the Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using the Fox formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and these are summed up to obtain the Tg (°C) of the polymer.
  • the Bicerano method is described in Prediction of Polymer Properties, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York (1993).
  • the calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using polymer property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
  • Methods for reducing the mobility of the main chain of the specific resin include the following methods (a) to (e). (a) introduction of a bulky substituent into the main chain; (b) introduction of a plurality of substituents into the main chain; (c) introduction of a substituent inducing an interaction between specific resins into the vicinity of the main chain; (d) formation of a main chain with a cyclic structure; (e) linking of a cyclic structure to the main chain.
  • the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit showing a homopolymer Tg of 130° C. or higher.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit having at least one type of group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
  • Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group contained in the specific resin include the repeating units described above in ⁇ Repeat units having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group>.
  • the preferred content is also as described above in ⁇ Repeat units having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group>.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group, in order to further improve the adhesion to the substrate and the affinity for the developer.
  • the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
  • the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group preferably does not have an acid-decomposable group. Examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0081] to [0084] of JP2014-098921A.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
  • the alkali-soluble group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bissulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol group (e.g., a hexafluoroisopropanol group) in which the ⁇ -position is substituted with an electron-withdrawing group, and the carboxy group is preferred.
  • the specific resin contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, thereby increasing the resolution in contact hole applications. Examples of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group include those described in paragraphs [0085] and [0086] of JP2014-098921A.
  • the specific resin may have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and a repeating unit that does not exhibit acid decomposability. This can reduce elution of low molecular weight components from the resist film into the immersion liquid during immersion exposure.
  • repeating units that have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and do not exhibit acid decomposability include repeating units derived from 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, diamantyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth)acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit represented by formula (III) that has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • R5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a -CH 2 -O-Ra 2 group, where Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (III) that does not have either a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0087] to [0094] of JP2014-098921A.
  • the specific resin may have repeating units other than the repeating units described above.
  • the specific resin may have a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxathiane ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantoin ring group.
  • the specific resin may have various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, suitability for standard developing solutions, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, etc.
  • the specific resin can be synthesized according to a conventional method (for example, radical polymerization).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific resin, as calculated as polystyrene by the GPC method, is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 to 30,000, even more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and particularly preferably 5,000 to 15,000.
  • the polydispersity index (PDI) of the specific resin is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3, even more preferably from 1.2 to 3.0, and particularly preferably from 1.2 to 2.0. The smaller the polydispersity index, the better the resolution and resist shape, and furthermore, the smoother the sidewalls of the resist pattern are, and the better the roughness is.
  • the content of the specific resin is preferably from 40.0 to 99.9 mass %, and more preferably from 60.0 to 90.0 mass %, based on the total solid content of the resist composition.
  • the specific resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the resist composition contains a photoacid generator which is composed of anions and cations and generates an acid upon exposure to actinic rays or radiation.
  • the photoacid generator is a compound in which the acid dissociation constant A (pKa(A)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation with a proton is smaller than both the acid dissociation constant B (pKa(B)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing a first cation of a first acid diffusion controller described below with a proton, and the acid dissociation constant C (pKa(C)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing a second cation of a second acid diffusion controller described below with a proton.
  • the photoacid generator may be in the form of a low molecular weight compound, or may be incorporated into a part of a polymer (e.g., the above-mentioned specific resin).Furthermore, the form of a low molecular weight compound and the form of being incorporated into a part of a polymer may be used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator is in the form of a low molecular weight compound
  • the molecular weight of the photoacid generator is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1000 or less. There is no particular lower limit, but a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably in the form of a low molecular weight compound.
  • photoacid generators include compounds (onium salts) represented by "M + X - ", and are preferably compounds that generate an organic acid upon exposure to light.
  • organic acid include sulfonic acids (aliphatic sulfonic acids, aromatic sulfonic acids, camphorsulfonic acids, etc.), carboxylic acids (aliphatic carboxylic acids, aromatic carboxylic acids, aralkyl carboxylic acids, etc.), carbonylsulfonylimide acids, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide acids, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide acids.
  • sulfonic acids aliphatic sulfonic acids, aromatic sulfonic acids, camphorsulfonic acids, etc.
  • carboxylic acids aliphatic carboxylic acids, aromatic carboxylic acids, aralkyl carboxylic acids, etc.
  • carbonylsulfonylimide acids bis(alkylsulfonyl)
  • M + represents a cation.
  • the cation is preferably an organic cation.
  • the organic cation is not particularly limited, and the valence of the organic cation may be monovalent or divalent or higher.
  • the organic cation is preferably a cation represented by formula (ZaI) (hereinafter also referred to as “cation (ZaI)”) or a cation represented by formula (ZaII) (hereinafter also referred to as “cation (ZaII)").
  • R 201 , R 202 and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the organic group is preferably 1 to 30, and more preferably 1 to 20.
  • Two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • Examples of the group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 include an alkylene group (e.g., a butylene group and a pentylene group) and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -.
  • Suitable embodiments of the organic cation in formula (ZaI) include cation (ZaI-1), cation (ZaI-2), cation (ZaI-3b), and cation (ZaI-4b), which will be described later.
  • the cation (ZaI-1) is an arylsulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 in the above formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
  • the arylsulfonium cation all of R 201 to R 203 may be aryl groups, or some of R 201 to R 203 may be aryl groups, with the remainder being alkyl groups or cycloalkyl groups.
  • R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, which may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group in the ring.
  • Examples of the group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 include alkylene groups in which one or more methylene groups may be substituted with oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, ester groups, amide groups, and/or carbonyl groups (e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -).
  • Arylsulfonium cations include triarylsulfonium cations, diarylalkylsulfonium cations, aryldialkylsulfonium cations, diarylcycloalkylsulfonium cations, and aryldicycloalkylsulfonium cations.
  • the aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure with an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • the heterocyclic structure may include a pyrrole residue, a furan residue, a thiophene residue, an indole residue, a benzofuran residue, and a benzothiophene residue.
  • the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
  • Examples of the alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation may have include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, or a cyclohexyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the substituent that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (e.g., having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylalkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine and iodine), a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an ester group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an alkylthio group, and a phenylthio group.
  • an alkyl group e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms
  • the above-mentioned substituent may further have a substituent, and it is also preferable that the above-mentioned alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent to form a halogenated alkyl group such as a trifluoromethyl group.
  • the above-mentioned substituent may be an acid-decomposable group.
  • the definition and preferred embodiments of the acid-decomposable group are as described above.
  • Cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in formula (ZaI) each independently represent an organic group not having an aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a heteroatom.
  • the organic group not having an aromatic ring preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, more preferably a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, or an alkoxycarbonylmethyl group, and still more preferably a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group.
  • alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include linear alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and branched alkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, and pentyl groups), as well as cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and norbornyl groups).
  • R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (eg, having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group. It is also preferred that the substituents of R 201 to R 203 each independently form an acid-decomposable group through any combination of the substituents.
  • the cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-3b).
  • R 1c to R 5c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, a cycloalkylcarbonyloxy group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
  • R 6c and R 7c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (eg, a t-butyl group), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
  • R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
  • the substituents of R 1c to R 7c and R x and R y may be acid-decomposable groups.
  • R 1c to R 5c , and R x and R y may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and each of these rings may independently have an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbon-carbon double bond.
  • R 5c and R 6c , and R 5c and R x may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and each of these rings may independently have a carbon-carbon double bond.
  • R 6c and R 7c may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the formed ring having an oxygen atom or the like means, for example, that two bondable groups (e.g., Rx and Ry ) are bonded to each other to form an alkylene group, and a methylene group in such an alkylene group is substituted with an oxygen atom or the like.
  • the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocyclic ring, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings.
  • the ring is preferably a 3- to 10-membered ring, more preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and even more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include a butylene group, a pentylene group, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - .
  • the groups formed by combining R5c and R6c , and R5c and Rx are preferably a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
  • the cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-4b).
  • R 13 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom or an iodine atom), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a group containing a cycloalkyl group (which may be a cycloalkyl group itself or a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). These groups may have a substituent.
  • a halogen atom e.g., a fluorine atom or an iodine atom
  • R 13 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom or an iodine atom), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, an alkoxy
  • R 14 represents a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, etc.), an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group containing a cycloalkyl group (which may be a cycloalkyl group itself or a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). These groups may have a substituent. When there are multiple R 14s , the multiple R 14s may be the same or different.
  • a halogen atom e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, etc.
  • an alkyl group e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom
  • Each R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. Two R 15 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When two R 15 are bonded to each other to form a ring, the ring structure may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom. In one embodiment, it is preferred that two R 15 are alkylene groups and are bonded to each other to form a ring structure. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the naphthyl group, and the ring formed by bonding two R 15 together may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group or a t-butyl group.
  • the groups represented by R 13 to R 15 may be acid-decomposable groups.
  • R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle with an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
  • the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 are preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, or a pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group).
  • a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms e.g., a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, or a pentyl group
  • a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms e.g
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent.
  • substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (e.g., having 6 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and a phenylthio group.
  • the substituent of R 204 and R 205 may be an acid-decomposable group.
  • X - is an organic anion having an acid dissociation constant A (pKa(A)) of an acidic compound A bonded to a proton that is smaller than the acid dissociation constant of an acidic compound obtained by replacing a cation of an acid diffusion controller described later with a proton.
  • the acid dissociation constant A is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above requirements, but is preferably ⁇ 10.00 to 4.00, more preferably ⁇ 8.00 to 2.00, and even more preferably ⁇ 8.00 to 0.00.
  • the anion is preferably an organic anion.
  • the organic anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include monovalent or divalent or higher organic anions.
  • anions having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction are preferred, and non-nucleophilic anions are more preferred.
  • non-nucleophilic anions examples include sulfonate anions (aliphatic sulfonate anions, aromatic sulfonate anions, camphorsulfonate anions, etc.), carboxylate anions (aliphatic carboxylate anions, aromatic carboxylate anions, aralkyl carboxylate anions, etc.), sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions.
  • the aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonate anion and the aliphatic carboxylate anion may be any of a linear or branched alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group may be, for example, a fluoroalkyl group (which may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom, or may be a perfluoroalkyl group).
  • the aryl group in the aromatic sulfonate anion and aromatic carboxylate anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group listed above may have a substituent.
  • the substituent is not particularly limited, but examples include a nitro group, a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, a carboxy group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon
  • the aralkyl group in the aralkyl carboxylate anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group, and a naphthylbutyl group.
  • sulfonylimide anion is the saccharin anion.
  • the alkyl group in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion and the tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • Substituents for these alkyl groups include a halogen atom, an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkyloxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, and a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group, and a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
  • the alkyl groups in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, which increases the acid strength.
  • non-nucleophilic anions include, for example, phosphorus fluorides (eg, PF 6 ⁇ ), boron fluorides (eg, BF 4 ⁇ ), and antimony fluorides (eg, SbF 6 ⁇ ).
  • Preferred non-nucleophilic anions are aliphatic sulfonate anions in which at least the ⁇ -position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, aromatic sulfonate anions substituted with a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions in which an alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, or tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions in which an alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • perfluoroaliphatic sulfonate anions preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms
  • benzenesulfonate anions having fluorine atoms are more preferable
  • nonafluorobutanesulfonate anions, perfluorooctanesulfonate anions, pentafluorobenzenesulfonate anions, or 3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzenesulfonate anions are even more preferable.
  • an anion represented by the following formula (AN2) is preferred.
  • o represents an integer from 1 to 3.
  • p represents an integer from 0 to 10.
  • q represents an integer from 0 to 10.
  • Each Xf independently represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, or an organic group having no fluorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • a plurality of Xf's may be the same or different.
  • Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3. Of these, it is preferable that both Xf are fluorine atoms.
  • R4 and R5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom. When a plurality of R4s and R5s are present, R4s and R5s may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • R4 and R5 are preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L represents a divalent linking group.
  • each L may be the same or different.
  • the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CONH-, and hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 17 carbon atoms (e.g., alkylene groups, cycloalkylene groups, or alkenylene groups), as well as groups combining two or more of these.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • one or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkylene group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, or -CO-.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably --O--, --CO--, an alkylene group, or a cycloalkylene group.
  • (L) q is preferably, for example, a group represented by formula (AN2-1).
  • * a represents the bonding position to C(R 4 )(R 5 ) in formula (AN2)
  • * b represents the bonding position to W in formula (AN2).
  • x, y, and z each independently represent an integer of 0 to 10, preferably 0 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • Rt1 and Rt2 each independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon group.
  • hydrocarbon group examples include an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 7 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably having 3 to 17 carbon atoms), and an alkenylene group (preferably having 2 to 8 carbon atoms).
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and a methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be either monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • Q 1 represents —COO—, —CO—, —O—, —O—CO—O—, —S—, —CONH—, —SO— or —SO 2 —, and is preferably —COO—, —CO— or —O—.
  • Q2 represents a single bond when y is 0, and represents a single bond or a divalent linking group mentioned for Q1 when y is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Q2 is preferably a single bond, -COO-, -CO- or -O-.
  • W represents an organic group containing a cyclic structure, and is preferably a cyclic organic group.
  • the cyclic organic group include an alicyclic group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the alicyclic group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group.
  • the monocyclic alicyclic group include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group.
  • polycyclic alicyclic group examples include polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, a decahydronaphthyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, a decahydronaphthyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group,
  • the aryl group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group, and examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and an anthryl group.
  • the heterocyclic group may be either a single ring or a polycyclic ring. In particular, when the heterocyclic group is a polycyclic ring, the diffusion of the acid can be more suppressed.
  • the heterocyclic group may have aromaticity or may not have aromaticity.
  • heterocyclic ring having aromaticity examples include a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, and a pyridine ring.
  • heterocyclic ring having no aromaticity examples include a tetrahydropyran ring, a lactone ring, a sultone ring, and a decahydroisoquinoline ring.
  • the cyclic organic group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include an alkyl group (which may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (which may be either monocyclic, polycyclic, or spirocyclic, and preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms), an aryl group (which preferably has 6 to 14 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an ester group, an amide group, a urethane group, a ureido group, a thioether group, a sulfonamide group, and a sulfonate ester group.
  • the carbon that constitutes the cyclic organic group (the carbon that contributes to the ring formation) may be a carbonyl carbon.
  • the anion represented by formula (AN2) is preferably SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CHF-CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -COO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CF 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -(L) q -W, or SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH(CF 3 )-OCO-(L) q' -W.
  • L, q and W are the same as those in formula (AN2).
  • q' represents an integer of 0 to 10.
  • non-nucleophilic anions include anions represented by the following formulas (d1-1) to (d1-4).
  • R 51 represents a hydrocarbon group (for example, an aryl group such as a phenyl group) which may have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group).
  • Z 2c represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (with the proviso that the carbon atom adjacent to S is not substituted with a fluorine atom).
  • the hydrocarbon group in Z 2c may be either linear or branched, and may have a cyclic structure.
  • the carbon atom in the hydrocarbon group (preferably, when the hydrocarbon group has a cyclic structure, the carbon atom that is a ring atom) may be a carbonyl carbon.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group include a group having a norbornyl group that may have a substituent.
  • the carbon atom forming the norbornyl group may be a carbonyl carbon.
  • Z 2c -SO 3 - " in formula (d1-2) is different from the anion represented by formula (AN2) above.
  • Z 2c is preferably other than an aryl group.
  • the atoms at the ⁇ -position and the ⁇ -position relative to -SO 3 - are preferably atoms other than a carbon atom having a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • the atom at the ⁇ -position and/or the atom at the ⁇ -position relative to -SO 3 - in Z 2c is a ring member atom in a cyclic group.
  • R 52 represents an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom)
  • Y 3 represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group, arylene group, or carbonyl group
  • Rf represents a hydrocarbon group
  • R 53 and R 54 each independently represent an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom), and R 53 and R 54 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the organic anion may be used alone or in combination of two or more types.
  • the content of the photoacid generator is preferably from 5 to 30 mass %, more preferably from 5 to 25 mass %, and even more preferably from 10 to 20 mass %, relative to the total solids content of the resist composition, from the viewpoint that the cross-sectional shape of the formed pattern becomes more rectangular.
  • the photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the resist composition of the present invention contains at least two types of acid diffusion controllers: a first acid diffusion controller and a second acid diffusion controller.
  • the acid diffusion controller is a compound consisting of an anion and a cation, and has an acid dissociation constant (pKa(Q)) greater than the pKa(A) of acidic compound A obtained by replacing the cation of the photoacid generator with a proton.
  • the acid diffusion controller is an onium salt that generates an acid that is weaker than the acid generated by the photoacid generator.
  • the anion contained in the acid diffusion controller has a pKa (Q) greater than the above-mentioned pKa (A).
  • the anion is preferably an organic anion.
  • the organic anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include monovalent or divalent or higher organic anions.
  • anions having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction are preferred, and non-nucleophilic anions are more preferred.
  • non-nucleophilic anions examples include sulfonate anions, carboxylate anions, sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions.
  • carboxylate anions, sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions are preferred, with carboxylate anions being more preferred.
  • the cation contained in the acid diffusion controller is preferably an organic cation.
  • the organic cation include a sulfonium cation, an ammonium cation, and an iodonium cation.
  • an organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used.
  • cation (ZaI) is preferred, cation (ZaI-1) or cation (ZaI-3b) is more preferred, and cation (ZaI-1) is even more preferred.
  • the acid diffusion controller is preferably a compound having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • at least one compound selected from the first acid diffusion controller and the second acid diffusion controller has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule.
  • the first acid diffusion control agent and the second acid diffusion control agent are described in detail below.
  • the first acid diffusion controller is an acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation.
  • the first anion is an organic anion having a polycyclic alicyclic structure and an anionic group.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure is a structure formed by condensing at least two or more alicyclic rings.
  • the upper limit of the number of rings contained in the polycyclic alicyclic structure is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 8 or less, and more preferably 5 or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but may be 2 or more, and is preferably 3 or more.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure preferably has a bridged structure. Examples of the polycyclic alicyclic structure having a bridged structure include an adamantane structure and a norbornane structure.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure preferably has 5 to 36 ring atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 ring atoms, and even more preferably 7 to 15 ring atoms. Examples of polycyclic alicyclic structures are shown below.
  • an adamantane structure (structure represented by formula (a1)), a norbornane structure (structure represented by formula (a2)), a structure represented by formula (a3), or a structure represented by formula (a4) is preferred, an adamantane structure or a norbornane structure is more preferred, and an adamantane structure is even more preferred.
  • One or more methylene groups constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, or —CO—, and an ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with a vinylene group.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be an adamantanone structure (structure represented by formula (a1-1) below) in which one methylene group constituting the adamantane structure is replaced with —CO—, or a norbornane structure (structure represented by formula (a2-3) below) in which one ethylene group constituting the norbornane structure is replaced with a vinylene group.
  • two or more adjacent methylene groups may be replaced with -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -CO-, respectively.
  • two adjacent methylene groups may be replaced with -O- and -CO-, respectively, to form a lactone ring.
  • Examples of polycyclic alicyclic structures in which at least one methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure is replaced with -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -CO-, or at least one ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure is replaced with a vinylene group are shown below.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure is preferably an adamantane structure, an adamantanone structure, a norbornane structure, a norbornene structure, a structure represented by formula (a3-1), or a structure represented by formula (a15-1), and more preferably an adamantane structure or an adamantanone structure.
  • the number of polycyclic alicyclic structures in the first anion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 2, and more preferably 1.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have a substituent.
  • substituents that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • the alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom is preferable, and a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable.
  • the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents
  • two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
  • the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
  • anionic group examples include groups represented by -CO 2 - , -SO 3 - , -SO 2 -N - and -SO 2 -N - -SO 2 -, with the group represented by -CO 2 - being preferred.
  • the anionic group and the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be bonded directly or via a linking group, but are preferably bonded directly.
  • the first anion does not have a hydrophobic substituent (for example, an alkyl group or a fluorine atom).
  • a hydrophobic substituent for example, an alkyl group or a fluorine atom.
  • the first anion it is also preferable for the first anion to have at least one site selected from a hydroxyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, and an ester bond, and it is more preferable for the first anion to have at least one site selected from a hydroxyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, and an ester bond.
  • the first anion is preferably an anion represented by the following formula (QA1):
  • W 1 represents a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent.
  • the definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
  • Examples of the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • the alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom is preferable, a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable, and a hydroxyl group is still more preferable.
  • the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents
  • two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
  • the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
  • the ring formed by bonding the two substituents together may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group is preferred.
  • L Q1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include divalent hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and combinations of these, provided that the group adjacent to X Q - is a divalent hydrocarbon group.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, more preferably 4 to 8, and even more preferably 4 to 6.
  • a methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably * W -O-CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W -CO-O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W -O-CO-cycloalkylene group-* X , * W -CO-O-cycloalkylene group-* X , * W -O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, W -CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, or * W -O-cycloalkylene group-* X .
  • L Q1 is preferably a single bond, * W -O-CO-alkylene group-* X , * W -CO-O-alkylene group-* X or * W -O-alkylene group-* X .
  • X Q - represents an anionic group.
  • anionic group examples include -CO 2 - and -SO 3 - , with -CO 2 - being preferred.
  • the anion represented by formula (QA1) may be an anion represented by formula (QA1-1).
  • L Q1 and X Q - have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as L Q1 and X Q - in formula (QA1).
  • W2 is a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent.
  • the definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
  • Examples of the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure represented by W2 may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • the alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms that may have a halogen atom is preferable, and a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, or an iodine atom is more preferable.
  • Y1 and Y2 each independently represent a methylene group or a heteroatom, preferably a methylene group, a sulfur atom, or an oxygen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Y1 and Y2 are preferably the same atom, more preferably Y1 and Y2 are an oxygen atom.
  • R Q1 is a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include a divalent hydrocarbon group, --O--, --CO--, --S--, --SO 2 --, and combinations of these.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, and more preferably 4 to 8.
  • a methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group, and is preferably a monocyclic group.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
  • the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 8, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group which may have a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, or a cycloalkylene group which may have a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkylene group.
  • the first anion may be an anion represented by formula (QA2).
  • W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- in formula (QA1-1).
  • R Q2 is a trivalent linking group.
  • the trivalent linking group includes a trivalent hydrocarbon group.
  • the methylene group constituting the trivalent hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, -CO-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group is preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms or a monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the first anion is preferably an anion represented by formula (QA1), in that the effects of the present invention are more excellent, and more preferably an anion represented by formula (QA1) that does not contain any ring other than the polycyclic alicyclic structure represented by W1 .
  • the pKa(B) of the acidic compound B formed by combining the first anion and a proton is not particularly limited as long as it is larger than the above-mentioned pKa(A), but the difference between pKa(B) and pKa(A) (pKa(B)-pKa(A)) is preferably 0.50 or more, more preferably 1.00 or more, and even more preferably 2.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, and it is preferably 10.00 or less, and more preferably 8.00 or less.
  • the pKa(B) is preferably from ⁇ 3.00 to 8.00, more preferably from ⁇ 1.00 to 7.00, and even more preferably from 0.00 to 5.00.
  • the ClogP value of the first anion is ⁇ 1.50 or less, and is preferably ⁇ 2.00 or less, and more preferably ⁇ 2.50 or less, in terms of providing better effects of the present invention. There is no particular lower limit, but is preferably ⁇ 5.00 or more, more preferably ⁇ 4.00 or more, and even more preferably ⁇ 3.00 or more, in terms of providing better effects of the present invention. If the ClogP value of the first anion exceeds ⁇ 1.50, the ability to quench the acid at the boundary between the exposed and unexposed areas decreases, which is undesirable since it deteriorates the effect of the present invention.
  • the volume of the first anion is not particularly limited as long as it is smaller than the volume of the second anion described below, but in terms of better effects of the present invention, it is preferably 300 ⁇ 3 or less, more preferably 250 ⁇ 3 or less, even more preferably 200 ⁇ 3 or less, and particularly preferably 190 ⁇ 3 or less. There is no particular lower limit, but it is preferably 100 ⁇ 3 or more, and more preferably 150 ⁇ 3 or more.
  • the volume of the anion can be calculated by the following method.
  • the anion structure is optimized by the PM3 (Parameterized Model number 3) method using MOPAC7 included in Winmostar (QM) (V10.7.5 for 64-bit Windows, software manufactured by X-Ability).
  • Non-Patent Document 1 Improvement of molecular surface area and volume calculation program, Teruo Nagao, pp. 111-120, No. 27, 1993, Journal of Hakodate National College of Technology
  • the first cation is not particularly limited, and for example, any organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used. Among them, a sulfonium cation or an iodonium cation is preferable, and a sulfonium cation is more preferable.
  • the first cation the above-mentioned cation (ZaI) is preferable, and the above-mentioned cation (ZaI-1) is more preferable, in terms of obtaining a better effect of the present invention.
  • the first cation is preferably a triarylsulfonium cation, and more preferably a triphenylsulfonium cation.
  • the first cation preferably has an electron-donating group as a substituent, and preferably has an alkyl group which may have a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as a substituent. In terms of obtaining better effects of the present invention, it is also preferable that the first cation has an iodine atom or a fluorine atom.
  • the ClogP value of the first cation is preferably 3.00 or more, and more preferably 5.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but it is preferably 20.00 or less, and more preferably 15.00 or less.
  • the content of the first acid diffusion controller is preferably 30.0% by mass or less, more preferably 20.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resist composition excluding the solvent. Although there is no particular lower limit, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the first acid diffusion controller to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably 0.3 to 1.0.
  • the second acid diffusion controller is an acid diffusion controller comprising a second anion and a second cation.
  • the second anion is preferably an organic anion having an anionic group.
  • the anionic group include groups represented by -CO 2 - , -SO 3 - , -SO 2 -N - and -SO 2 -N - -SO 2 -, with the group represented by -CO 2 - being preferred.
  • the second anion preferably has a ring structure.
  • the ring structure include a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring structure and a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic structure, with a polycyclic aromatic ring structure or a polycyclic alicyclic structure being preferred, and a polycyclic alicyclic structure being more preferred.
  • the aromatic ring structure include a benzene ring structure, a naphthalene structure, and an anthracene structure.
  • the monocyclic alicyclic structure includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl ring having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be the polycyclic alicyclic structure possessed by the first anion, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the number of ring structures in the second anion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2 or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 4 or less.
  • the combination is not particularly limited, but it preferably has one or more polycyclic alicyclic structures, and more preferably has a polycyclic alicyclic structure and a monocyclic alicyclic structure.
  • An example of the second anion is an anion represented by formula (QA3).
  • W3 represents an alicyclic structure which may have a substituent.
  • the alicyclic structure may be either a polycyclic or monocyclic structure, with a polycyclic alicyclic structure being preferred.
  • the monocyclic alicyclic structure is, for example, a cycloalkane.
  • the cycloalkane preferably has 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 5 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
  • Examples of the substituent that the alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • the alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible.
  • the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
  • the substituent that the alicyclic structure may have is preferably a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, or an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, and more preferably a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, or an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Examples of the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
  • the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
  • the ring formed by bonding the two substituents together may further have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent include the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group is preferred.
  • L Q3 represents a single bond or a divalent substituent.
  • the divalent linking group include divalent hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and combinations of these, provided that the group adjacent to X Q - is a divalent hydrocarbon group.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
  • the alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, more preferably 4 to 8, and even more preferably 4 to 6.
  • a methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • L Q3 is preferably a single bond, * W3 -O-CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W3 -CO-O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W3 -CO-O-cycloalkylene group-* X or * W3 -O-CO-cycloalkylene group-* X .
  • * W3 represents the bonding position to W3
  • * X represents the bonding position to XQ- .
  • X Q - represents an anionic group.
  • X Q - has the same meaning as X Q - in formula (Q1), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the anion represented by formula (QA3) is also preferably an anion represented by formula (QA3-1).
  • W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , X Q ⁇ and R Q1 have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , X Q ⁇ and R Q1 in formula (QA1-1).
  • R Q1 is preferably an alkylene group which may have a halogen atom.
  • L 3 Q3 has the same meaning as L 3 Q3 in formula (QA3), and the preferred embodiments are also the same. Examples of the structure of the second anion represented by formula (QA3-1), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: ⁇ 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
  • the second anion is preferably an anion represented by formula (QA4).
  • W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- have the same meanings as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- in formula (QA1-1), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • R Q4 is a trivalent linking group.
  • the trivalent linking group includes a trivalent hydrocarbon group.
  • the methylene group constituting the trivalent hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, -CO-, or -SO 2 -.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent.
  • substituents examples include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
  • the trivalent hydrocarbon group is preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a trivalent monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably a trivalent monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • an anion represented by formula (QA3) or an anion represented by formula (QA4) is preferable, an anion represented by formula (QA3) is more preferable, and an anion represented by formula (QA3-1) is even more preferable.
  • the pKa(C) of the acidic compound C formed by combining the second anion and a proton is not particularly limited as long as it is larger than the above-mentioned pKa(A), but the difference between pKa(C) and pKa(A) (pKa(C)-pKa(A)) is preferably 0.50 or more, more preferably 1.00 or more, and even more preferably 2.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, and it is preferably 10.00 or less, and more preferably 8.00 or less.
  • the pKa(C) is preferably from ⁇ 3.00 to 8.00, more preferably from ⁇ 1.00 to 7.00, and even more preferably from 0.00 to 5.00.
  • the volume of the second anion is larger than that of the first anion and is 250 ⁇ 3 or more.
  • the volume of the second anion is preferably 260 ⁇ 3 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but the volume is preferably 500 ⁇ 3 or less, and more preferably 400 ⁇ 3 or less. If the volume of the second anion is less than 250 ⁇ 3 , the ability to quench the acid in the unexposed area decreases, which is undesirable since it deteriorates the effect of the present invention.
  • the volume of the second anion can be calculated by the method described above.
  • the ClogP value of the second anion is preferably -5.00 to 3.00, more preferably -3.00 to 0.00, even more preferably -2.00 to -0.50, and particularly preferably -1.50 to -1.00.
  • the first cation is not particularly limited, and for example, an organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used.
  • the preferred embodiments of the second cation are the same as those of the first cation.
  • the first cation and the second cation can be the same or different.
  • the ClogP value of the second cation is preferably 3.00 or more, and more preferably 5.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but it is preferably 20.00 or less, and more preferably 15.00 or less.
  • the content of the second acid diffusion controller is preferably from 0.1 to 30.0 mass %, more preferably from 1.0 to 20.0 mass %, and even more preferably from 3.0 to 10.0 mass %, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent of the resist composition.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the second acid diffusion controller to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably from 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably from 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably from 0.3 to 1.0.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the second acid diffusion controller to the content of the first acid diffusion controller is preferably 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably 0.3 to 1.0.
  • the resist composition may contain an acid diffusion controller other than those mentioned above.
  • acid diffusion control agents other than those mentioned above include basic compounds, low molecular weight compounds having a nitrogen atom and a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and compounds whose acid diffusion control ability is reduced or lost by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
  • the resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin that is different from the specific resin.
  • the hydrophobic resin is preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike a surfactant, it does not necessarily have to have a hydrophilic group in the molecule, and does not necessarily have to contribute to uniform mixing of polar and non-polar substances.
  • the effects of adding a hydrophobic resin include control of the static and dynamic contact angle of water on the resist film surface, and suppression of outgassing.
  • the hydrophobic resin preferably has one or more of a fluorine atom, a silicon atom, and a CH3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin, and more preferably has two or more of them.
  • the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having at least 5 carbon atoms. Such a group may be present in the main chain of the resin, or may be substituted on a side chain. Examples of hydrophobic resins include the compounds described in paragraphs [0275] to [0279] of WO 2020/004306.
  • the hydrophobic resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably from 0.01 to 20.0 mass %, and more preferably from 0.1 to 15.0 mass %, based on the total solid content of the resist composition.
  • the resist composition may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant When a surfactant is contained, a pattern having superior adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant, and from the standpoint of environmental regulations, a silicon-based surfactant is more preferred. Examples of the fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraphs [0218] and [0219] of WO 2018/193954.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.0001 to 2.0 mass %, more preferably from 0.0005 to 1.0 mass %, and even more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 mass %, relative to the total solid content of the resist composition.
  • the resist composition preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent preferably contains (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) at least one selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactate ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionate ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate.
  • the combination of the above-mentioned solvent and the specific resin is preferable in terms of improving the coatability of the resist composition and reducing the number of development defects of the pattern.
  • the above-mentioned solvent has a good balance of the solubility, boiling point, and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, so that it can suppress unevenness in the thickness of the resist film and the occurrence of precipitates during spin coating. Details of the components (M1) and (M2) are described in paragraphs [0218] to [0226] of WO 2020/004306, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the solvent may further contain a component other than the component (M1) and the component (M2).
  • the content of the component other than the component (M1) and the component (M2) is preferably 5 to 30 mass % based on the total amount of the solvent.
  • the content of the solvent in the resist composition is preferably 70 to 99.5% by mass, and more preferably 80 to 99% by mass.
  • the resist composition may contain additives other than those mentioned above.
  • additives include dissolution-inhibiting compounds (compounds with a molecular weight of 3000 or less that are decomposed by the action of acid and have reduced solubility in organic developers), dyes, plasticizers, photosensitizers, light absorbers, and compounds that promote solubility in developers (for example, phenol compounds with a molecular weight of 1000 or less, and alicyclic or aliphatic compounds containing a carbonyl group).
  • the resist composition may contain water, but it is preferable that the water content is small.
  • the content of water is often 1 to 30,000 ppm by mass relative to the total mass of the resist composition, and is preferably 10,000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 5,000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 1,000 ppm by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppm by mass is preferable.
  • the resist composition may contain residual monomers, but the content thereof is preferably small.
  • the residual monomers include monomers used in the synthesis of the specific resin.
  • the content of the residual monomer is often 1 to 30,000 ppm by mass relative to the total mass of the resist composition, and is preferably 10,000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 5,000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 1,000 ppm by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppm by mass is preferable.
  • the resist composition of the present specification is suitably used as a resist composition for EUV exposure.
  • EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than ArF light (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and therefore the number of incident photons is smaller when exposed at the same sensitivity. Therefore, the effect of "photon shot noise," which is the stochastic variation in the number of photons, is large, leading to deterioration of LER and bridge defects.
  • One method of reducing photon shot noise is to increase the exposure dose to increase the number of incident photons, but this is a trade-off with the demand for higher sensitivity.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention includes the following steps.
  • Step 1 A step of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition.
  • Step 2 A step of exposing the resist film.
  • Step 3 A step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer to form a resist pattern. Each step may be performed only once or multiple times. Each step will be described in detail below.
  • Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition.
  • the resist composition is as defined above.
  • An example of a method for forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition is a method in which the resist composition is applied onto a substrate. It is preferable to filter the resist composition before coating as necessary.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the substrate is not particularly limited, and may be a substrate generally used in the manufacturing process of semiconductors such as ICs, or circuit boards such as liquid crystal or thermal heads, and in other lithography processes for photofabrication, etc.
  • Specific examples include inorganic substrates such as silicon, SiO 2 , and SiN.
  • an undercoat film for example, an inorganic film, an organic film, or an anti-reflective film may be formed under the resist film.
  • the resist composition can be applied onto a substrate, for example, using a spinner or coater.
  • the preferred application method is spin coating using a spinner.
  • the rotation speed when spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
  • a drying treatment may be carried out to form a resist film.
  • a drying method for example, a method of drying by heating may be mentioned. Heating may be carried out by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or a developing machine, and may be carried out using a hot plate or the like.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150° C., more preferably 80 to 140° C., and even more preferably 80 to 130° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, and even more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
  • the thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 120 nm, since it allows for the formation of fine patterns with higher accuracy.
  • the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 65 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 50 nm.
  • the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 120 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 90 nm.
  • a top coat may be formed on the resist film using a top coat composition.
  • the top coat composition is preferably a composition that does not mix with the resist film and can be applied uniformly onto the resist film.
  • the thickness of the top coat is preferably from 10 to 200 nm, more preferably from 20 to 100 nm, and even more preferably from 40 to 80 nm.
  • the composition and method of forming the top coat are not particularly limited, and a known top coat can be formed using a known method.
  • the top coat can be formed based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP2014-059543A.
  • the top coat contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl group, and an ester group.
  • Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film to light.
  • the exposure method may be a method in which the formed resist film is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation through a predetermined mask.
  • the actinic ray or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, and electron beams, preferably having a wavelength of 250 nm or less, more preferably having a wavelength of 220 nm or less, and particularly preferably having a wavelength of 1 to 200 nm, specifically, KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimer laser (193 nm), F2 excimer laser (157 nm), EUV (13.5 nm), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • post-exposure baking After exposure, it is preferable to perform post-exposure baking (PEB) before development.
  • the post-exposure baking promotes the reaction of the exposed area, resulting in better sensitivity and pattern shape.
  • Heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or development machine, and may be performed using a hot plate or the like.
  • the heating temperature is preferably from 80 to 150°C, more preferably from 80 to 140°C, and even more preferably from 80 to 130°C.
  • the heating time is preferably from 10 to 1,000 seconds, more preferably from 10 to 180 seconds, and even more preferably from 30 to 120 seconds.
  • Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film with a developer to obtain a resist pattern.
  • the developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter, also referred to as an "organic developer").
  • Examples of the developing method include a method of immersing a substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), a method of piling up the developing solution on the substrate surface by surface tension and leaving it still for a certain period of time to develop (paddle method), a method of spraying the developing solution on the substrate surface (spray method), and a method of continuously discharging the developing solution while scanning a developing solution discharge nozzle at a constant speed onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic dispense method).
  • a step of stopping the development may be carried out while replacing the developer with another solvent.
  • the developing time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably from 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably from 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably from 0 to 50°C, and more preferably from 15 to 35°C.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous alkaline solution containing an alkali.
  • examples of the type of the aqueous alkaline solution include an alkaline solution containing a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, or a cyclic amine.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH).
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • the alkaline developer may contain an appropriate amount of alcohol.
  • the alkaline developer usually has a basic compound concentration of 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the alkaline developer usually has a pH of 10.0 to 15.0.
  • the organic developer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents.
  • ketone solvents and ester solvents the organic solvents described in paragraphs [0179] to [0180] of JP 2022-125078 A can be used, and as the alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents, the solvents disclosed in paragraphs ⁇ 0715> to ⁇ 0718> of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167 A1 can be used.
  • the organic solvent contained in the organic developer may be a mixture of two or more organic solvents, or may be mixed with water.
  • the water content of the entire organic developer is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, even more preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably from 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably from 80 to 100% by mass, still more preferably from 90 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably from 95 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer.
  • the developer may contain a surfactant, if necessary.
  • the above pattern forming method preferably includes, after step 3, a rinsing step of cleaning the pattern with a rinsing liquid.
  • the rinsing liquid is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the pattern.
  • the rinsing liquid used in the rinsing step after the development step using an alkaline developer is, for example, pure water.
  • a rinse liquid used in a rinse step following a development step using an organic developer a solution containing a general organic solvent that does not dissolve the pattern can be used.
  • the organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of hydrocarbon solvents, ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, and ether solvents.
  • a suitable amount of a surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
  • the above cleaning method is not particularly limited, and examples include a method in which the rinse solution is continuously discharged onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (spin coating method), a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with the rinse solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method in which the rinse solution is sprayed onto the substrate surface (spray method).
  • the pattern forming method may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. This step removes the developer and rinsing solution remaining between and inside the patterns. This step also anneals the resist pattern, improving the surface roughness of the pattern.
  • the heating step after the rinsing step is preferably carried out at 40 to 250° C. (preferably 90 to 200° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
  • the formed pattern may be used as a mask to perform an etching process on the substrate, which is the object to be etched.
  • the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the base film and the substrate) to form a pattern on the substrate.
  • the method for processing the substrate (or the undercoat film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, a method is preferred in which the substrate (or the undercoat film and the substrate) is dry-etched using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask to form a pattern on the substrate.
  • the dry etching is preferably oxygen plasma etching.
  • the resist composition and various materials used in the pattern formation method of the present invention preferably do not contain impurities such as metals.
  • the content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb or less, even more preferably 100 mass ppt or less, particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and most preferably 1 mass ppt or less.
  • metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, W, and Zn.
  • An example of a method for removing impurities such as metals from various materials is filtration using a filter.
  • the method described in paragraph [0321] of WO 2020/004306 can be used.
  • Methods for reducing metal and other impurities contained in various materials include, for example, selecting raw materials with low metal content as the raw materials that make up the various materials, filtering the raw materials that make up the various materials, and performing distillation under conditions that minimize contamination as much as possible, such as lining the inside of the equipment with Teflon (registered trademark).
  • impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filtration and an adsorbent may be used.
  • adsorbent known adsorbents may be used, for example, inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite
  • organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • the content of metal components contained in the cleaning solution after use is preferably 100 parts per trillion (ppt) by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppt by mass or less, and even more preferably 1 ppt by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppt by mass or more is preferable.
  • a conductive compound may be added to an organic processing liquid such as a developer and a rinse liquid in order to prevent breakdown of chemical piping and various parts (such as filters, O-rings, and tubes) due to static charging and subsequent static discharge.
  • the conductive compound is not particularly limited, but an example thereof is methanol.
  • the amount added is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of maintaining favorable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics, it is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0.01% by mass or more is preferable.
  • the chemical liquid piping may be made of, for example, stainless steel (SUS), or various piping coated with antistatic polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.).
  • the filter and O-ring may be made of antistatic polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.).
  • the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, which includes the above-mentioned pattern formation method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
  • the electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted in electric and electronic equipment (such as home appliances, OA (Office Automation), media-related equipment, optical equipment, and communication equipment).
  • Table 1 shows the compositions of the resins (P-1) to (P-10) of the respective examples and comparative examples.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • PDI polydispersity index
  • the "content [mol %]” column in Table 1 indicates the content (mol %) of each repeating unit relative to the total repeating units in the resin.
  • PA-1 to PA-2 contained in the photoacid generators of each Example and Comparative Example, and the pKa of the acidic compounds formed when each anion is bonded to a proton.
  • first anions (A1-1) to (A1-5) contained in the first acid diffusion controller of each Example the anions (CA1-1) to (CA1-2) contained in the first acid diffusion controller of each Comparative Example, and the pKa of the acidic compound formed when each anion is bonded to a proton.
  • the photoacid generator, first acid diffusion controller, and second acid diffusion controller in each of the examples and comparative examples are compounds consisting of the cations and anions shown in Table 1.
  • the first acid diffusion controller used in Example 1 is a compound consisting of a cation (C-1) (first cation) and an anion (A1-1) (first anion), and is represented by the following structure.
  • a mixed solvent having the following composition was used as a solvent for the resist composition.
  • Table 2 shows the composition of each of the hydrophobic resins (D-1) to (D-8).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and polydispersity index (“PDI” (Mw/Mn)) are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)).
  • the “content [mol %]” column in Table 2 indicates the content (mol %) of each repeating unit relative to the total repeating units in the resin.
  • E-1 Megafac F176 (manufactured by DIC, fluorosurfactant)
  • E-2 Megafac R08 (manufactured by DIC, fluorine and silicon surfactant)
  • E-3 PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorosurfactant)
  • a mixed liquid was prepared by mixing the components and the solvent in the ratio shown in Table 3. The solvent was added so that the solid concentration was 2.5 mass %. The resulting mixture was filtered in this order through a UPE (ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) filter having a pore size of 0.1 ⁇ m, a Nylon filter having a pore size of 0.02 ⁇ m, and a UPE filter having a pore size of 0.01 ⁇ m, to obtain resist compositions of each of the Examples and Comparative Examples.
  • UPE ultra high molecular weight polyethylene
  • a base film-forming composition AL412 manufactured by Brewer Science was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a thickness of 5 nm.
  • the resist composition of each of the examples and comparative examples was applied onto the obtained base film and baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of 35 nm.
  • the wafer coated with the resist film was subjected to pattern exposure using an EUV exposure apparatus (Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36) manufactured by Exitech Corp.
  • EUV exposure apparatus Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36
  • a line and space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm was used.
  • the exposed resist film was baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds, and then developed for 30 seconds using butyl acetate as a developer, followed by spin drying to obtain a negative-type line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm.
  • a base film-forming composition AL412 manufactured by Brewer Science was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a thickness of 5 nm.
  • the resist composition of each of the Examples and Comparative Examples was applied onto the obtained base film and baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of 30 nm.
  • the wafer coated with the resist film was subjected to pattern exposure using an EUV exposure device (Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36) manufactured by Exitech Corp.
  • EUV exposure device Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36
  • An exposure mask having a line and space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm was used.
  • the exposed resist film was baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds, and then developed for 30 seconds using a tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution (concentration: 2.38% by mass) as a developer. After rinsing with pure water for 30 seconds, the resist film was spin-dried to obtain a positive-type line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm.
  • 3 ⁇ is 3.0 nm or less 4: 3 ⁇ is more than 3.0 nm and less than 3.5 nm 3: 3 ⁇ is more than 3.5 nm and less than 4.0 nm 2: 3 ⁇ is more than 4.0 nm and less than 4.5 nm 1: 3 ⁇ is more than 4.5 nm
  • the volumes are values calculated using Winmostar (QM) (version 20.1.1.125, manufactured by X-Ability) using the method described above.
  • Table 4 is a continuation of Table 3.
  • the resist composition of Example 1 contains the first anion A1-1 shown in Table 3 and the resin P-1 shown in Table 4.
  • the resist composition of the present invention was capable of forming a resist pattern with small LWR. From a comparison between Examples 1 to 3 and 5, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the volume of the first anion is 200 ⁇ 3 or less. From a comparison between Examples 1 and 6 to 9, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the ClogP value of the first cation is 5.00 or more. From a comparison between Examples 1 and 10 to 13, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention were more excellent when the content of the first acid diffusion controller was 15 mass % or less based on the total solid content of the resist composition.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition from which a resist pattern having a small LWR can be formed. An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to the present invention comprises: a resin of which the polarity increases due to the action of an acid; a photoacid generator that includes an anion and a cation and generates an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray or radiation; a first acid diffusion control agent including a first anion and a first cation; and a second acid diffusion control agent including a second anion and a second cation. The first anion has a predetermined alicyclic structure that includes multiple rings and is optionally substituted. The ClogP value of the first anion is at most -1.50. The volume of the second anion is greater than that of the first anion. The volume of the second anion is at least 250 Å3.

Description

感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、レジスト膜、パターン形成方法、電子デバイスの製造方法Actinic ray- or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
 本発明は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、レジスト膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to an actinic ray- or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a resist film, a pattern forming method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device.
 KrFエキシマレーザー(248nm)用レジストの開発以降、光吸収による感度低下を補うべく、化学増幅を利用したパターン形成方法が用いられている。化学増幅を利用したパターン形成方法としては、例えば、下記の方法が挙げられる。
 光酸発生剤を含む感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下、「レジスト組成物」ともいう。)を用いて形成された感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂膜(以下、「レジスト膜」ともいう。)を露光し、光酸発生剤から酸を発生させる。上記酸を触媒として、レジスト組成物に含まれる樹脂の、現像液(例えば、アルカリ水溶液又は有機溶媒)に対する溶解性を変化させる。その後、現像液を用いて、レジスト膜の露光部又は未露光部を除去して、所望のパターンを得る。
Since the development of resists for KrF excimer lasers (248 nm), pattern formation methods using chemical amplification have been used to compensate for the loss of sensitivity due to light absorption. Examples of pattern formation methods using chemical amplification include the following methods.
An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin film (hereinafter also referred to as a "resist film") formed using an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition (hereinafter also referred to as a "resist composition") containing a photoacid generator is exposed to light to generate an acid from the photoacid generator. The acid is used as a catalyst to change the solubility of the resin contained in the resist composition in a developer (e.g., an alkaline aqueous solution or an organic solvent). Thereafter, the exposed or unexposed portion of the resist film is removed using the developer to obtain a desired pattern.
 このような方法に用いられるレジスト組成物として、種々の構成が提案されている。
 例えば、特許文献1には、特定の構造を有するクエンチャーを含む組成物が開示されている。
As resist compositions for use in such methods, various configurations have been proposed.
For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a composition containing a quencher having a specific structure.
特開2020-046662号公報JP 2020-046662 A
 本発明者らが、特許文献1に記載のレジスト組成物について検討したところ、得られるレジストパターンのLWR(Line Width Roughness)について改善の余地があることを知見した。 The inventors have studied the resist composition described in Patent Document 1 and found that there is room for improvement in the LWR (Line Width Roughness) of the resulting resist pattern.
 そこで本発明は、LWRが小さいレジストパターンを形成可能な、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成されるレジスト膜、並びに、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いたパターン形成方法及びデバイスの製造方法を提供することも課題とする。
Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition which is capable of forming a resist pattern with small LWR.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a resist film formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, as well as a pattern forming method and a device manufacturing method using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 本発明者らは、上記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討した結果、以下の構成により課題を解決できることを見出した。  As a result of extensive research into solving the above problems, the inventors have discovered that the problems can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕 酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂と、
 アニオンとカチオンとからなり、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する光酸発生剤と、
 第1アニオンと第1カチオンとからなる第1酸拡散制御剤と、
 第2アニオンと第2カチオンとからなる第2酸拡散制御剤と、を含み、
 上記光酸発生剤中の上記カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Aが、上記第1酸拡散制御剤の上記第1カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数B、及び上記第2酸拡散制御剤の上記第2カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Cのいずれよりも小さく、
 上記第1アニオンが置換基を有していてもよい多環の脂環構造を有し、上記多環の脂環構造を構成するメチレン基は-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよく、上記多環の脂環構造を構成するエチレン基はビニレン基で置換されていてもよく、上記多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 上記第1アニオンのClogP値が-1.50以下であり、
 上記第2アニオンの体積が上記第1アニオンの体積よりも大きく、
 上記第2アニオンの体積が250Å以上である、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔2〕 上記第1アニオンが、置換基を有していてもよいアダマンタン構造を有し、上記アダマンタン構造を構成するメチレン基は-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよく、上記アダマンタン構造を構成するエチレン基はビニレン基で置換されていてもよく、上記アダマンタン構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい、〔1〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔3〕 上記第1アニオンの体積が、200Å以下である、〔1〕又は〔2〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔4〕 上記第1カチオンのClogP値が、5.00以上である、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔5〕 上記第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量が、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分に対して、15質量%以下である、〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔6〕 上記第1酸拡散制御剤及び上記第2酸拡散制御剤の少なくとも1つが、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、〔1〕~〔5〕のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔7〕 〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成された、レジスト膜。
 〔8〕 〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程1と、
 上記レジスト膜を露光する工程2と、
 現像液を用いて、上記露光されたレジスト膜を現像して、レジストパターンを得る工程3と、を有する、パターン形成方法。
 〔9〕 〔8〕に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。
[1] A resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid;
a photoacid generator which comprises an anion and a cation and generates an acid when exposed to actinic rays or radiation;
a first acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation;
a second acid diffusion control agent comprising a second anion and a second cation;
an acid dissociation constant A of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation in the photoacid generator with a proton is smaller than both an acid dissociation constant B of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the first cation in the first acid diffusion controller with a proton and an acid dissociation constant C of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the second cation in the second acid diffusion controller with a proton;
the first anion has a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -, an ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with a vinylene group, and when the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring;
the first anion has a ClogP value of −1.50 or less;
the volume of the second anion is greater than the volume of the first anion;
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, wherein the second anion has a volume of 250 Å3 or more.
[2] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1], wherein the first anion has an adamantane structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the adamantane structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -, an ethylene group constituting the adamantane structure may be substituted with a vinylene group, and when the adamantane structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
[3] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1] or [2], wherein the first anion has a volume of 200 Å3 or less.
[4] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the first cation has a ClogP value of 5.00 or more.
[5] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein the content of the first acid diffusion controller is 15 mass% or less based on the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
[6] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein at least one of the first acid diffusion controller and the second acid diffusion controller contains at least one atom selected from the group consisting of a fluorine atom and an iodine atom.
[7] A resist film formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [6].
[8] A step 1 of forming a resist film on a substrate using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [6];
A step 2 of exposing the resist film;
and step 3 of developing the exposed resist film with a developer to obtain a resist pattern.
[9] A method for producing an electronic device, comprising the pattern forming method according to [8].
 本発明によれば、LWRが小さいレジストパターンを形成可能な、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供できる。
 また、本発明は、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成されるレジスト膜、並びに、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いたパターン形成方法及びデバイスの製造方法も提供できる。
According to the present invention, there is provided an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of forming a resist pattern with small LWR.
The present invention can also provide a resist film formed using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, as well as a pattern forming method and a device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 以下、本発明について詳述する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に制限されない。
The present invention will be described in detail below.
The following description of the configuration may be based on a representative embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment.
 本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。 In this specification, a numerical range expressed using "~" means a range that includes the numerical values written before and after "~" as the lower and upper limits.
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記について、本発明の趣旨に反しない限り、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基と共に置換基を含む基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 置換基としては、特に断らない限り、1価の置換基が好ましい。
 本明細書において、「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
 本明細書において、表記される2価の連結基の結合方向は、特に断らない限り制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、Yは、-CO-O-であってもよく、-O-CO-であってもよい。すなわち、上記化合物は「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよく、「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよい。
 本明細書において、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレート及びメタクリレートを表し、(メタ)アクリルはアクリル及びメタクリルを表す。
In the present specification, the notation of groups (atomic groups) that does not indicate whether they are substituted or unsubstituted includes not only groups that have no substituents but also groups that have a substituent, unless it is contrary to the spirit of the present invention. For example, an "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group that has no substituents (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group that has a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
As the substituent, unless otherwise specified, a monovalent substituent is preferred.
As used herein, an "organic group" refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
In this specification, the bonding direction of the divalent linking group is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y is -COO- in a compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z", Y may be -CO-O- or -O-CO-. That is, the compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
In this specification, (meth)acrylate refers to acrylate and methacrylate, and (meth)acrylic refers to acrylic and methacrylic.
 本明細書において、「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光: Extreme Ultraviolet)、X線、及び電子線(EB:Electron Beam)を意味する。
 本明細書において、「光」とは、活性光線又は放射線を意味する。
 本明細書において、「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV:Extreme ultraviolet)、及びX線等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も含む。
In this specification, "actinic rays" or "radiation" refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV light: extreme ultraviolet), X-rays, and electron beams (EB).
In this specification, "light" means actinic rays or radiation.
In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet light represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet light (EUV: extreme ultraviolet), X-rays, and the like, but also drawing with particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
 本明細書において、「ppm」は「parts-per-million(10-6)」を意味し、「ppb」は「parts-per-billion(10-9)」を意味し、「ppt」は「parts-per-trillion(10-12)」を意味する。
 本明細書において、1Åは1×10-10mである。
In this specification, "ppm" means "parts-per-million (10 -6 ),""ppb" means "parts-per-billion (10 -9 )," and "ppt" means "parts-per-trillion (10 -12 )."
In this specification, 1 Å is equal to 1×10 −10 m.
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)、数平均分子量(Mn)、及び多分散度(「PDI」ともいう。)(Mw/Mn)は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)装置(東ソー社製HLC-8120GPC)によるGPC測定(溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン、流量(サンプル注入量):10μL、カラム:東ソー社製TSK gel Multipore HXL-M、カラム温度:40℃、流速:1.0mL/分、検出器:示差屈折率検出器(Refractive Index Detector))によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。 In this specification, weight average molecular weight (Mw), number average molecular weight (Mn), and polydispersity index (also referred to as "PDI") (Mw/Mn) are defined as polystyrene equivalent values measured using a Gel Permeation Chromatography (GPC) device (Tosoh Corporation HLC-8120GPC) (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection amount): 10 μL, column: Tosoh Corporation TSK gel Multipore HXL-M, column temperature: 40°C, flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, detector: differential refractive index detector).
 本明細書において、酸解離定数(pKa)とは、水溶液中でのpKaを表すが、水溶液中でのpKaが算出できない場合には、「ジメチルスルホキシド(DMSO)溶液中でのpKa」を採用する。
 上記pKaは、例えば、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた計算、並びに分子軌道計算法を用いて計算できる。分子軌道計算法の具体的な方法としては、熱力学サイクルに基づいて、水溶液中におけるH解離自由エネルギーを計算することで算出する手法が挙げられる。H解離自由エネルギーの計算方法については、例えばDFT(密度汎関数法)により計算することができるが、他にも様々な手法が文献等で報告されており、これに制限されるものではない。
 本明細書において、pKaは下記ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を、計算により求めた値である。
 ソフトウェアパッケージ1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs)
 なお、上記手法によりpKaが算出できない場合には、分子軌道計算法によって求められる値を採用する。分子軌道計算法を用いた具体的な方法としては、DFTに基づいてGaussian16を用いて得られる値を採用する。
In this specification, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) refers to the pKa in an aqueous solution. When the pKa in an aqueous solution cannot be calculated, the "pKa in a dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) solution" is used.
The pKa can be calculated, for example, by calculation based on the database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values, and by using molecular orbital calculation method.Specific methods of molecular orbital calculation method include a method of calculating by calculating H + dissociation free energy in aqueous solution based on thermodynamic cycle.The calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated, for example, by DFT (density functional theory), but there are various other methods reported in literature, etc., and it is not limited thereto.
In this specification, pKa is a value calculated using the following software package 1 based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values.
Software package 1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs)
In addition, when the pKa cannot be calculated by the above method, a value obtained by a molecular orbital calculation method is used. As a specific method using the molecular orbital calculation method, a value obtained using Gaussian 16 based on DFT is used.
 本明細書において、ClogP値とは、1-オクタノールと水への分配係数Pの常用対数logPを計算によって求めた値である。ClogP値の計算に用いる方法及びソフトウェアについては公知の物を使用できるが、特に断らない限り、本発明ではPerkinElmer社製のChemDrawProfessional(バージョン20.1.1.125)を用いて構造を描画し、上記ソフトウェアを用いて算出した値を採用する。 In this specification, the ClogP value is the value obtained by calculating the common logarithm logP of the partition coefficient P between 1-octanol and water. Any known method and software can be used to calculate the ClogP value, but unless otherwise specified, in this invention, the structure is drawn using ChemDraw Professional (version 20.1.1.125) manufactured by PerkinElmer, and the value calculated using the above software is used.
 「固形分」とは、レジスト膜を形成する成分を意味し、溶媒は含まれない。また、レジスト膜を形成する成分であれば、その性状が液体状であっても、固形分とみなす。 "Solids" refers to the components that form the resist film, and does not include solvents. In addition, if a component forms a resist film, it is considered to be a solid even if it is in liquid form.
 本明細書において、単に「酸拡散制御剤」と記載した場合は、第1酸拡散制御剤及び第2酸拡散制御剤を包含する概念を表す。 In this specification, when the term "acid diffusion control agent" is used, it refers to a concept that includes a first acid diffusion control agent and a second acid diffusion control agent.
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(レジスト組成物)]
 以下、本発明のレジスト組成物について詳述する。
 本発明のレジスト組成物は、酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂と、アニオンとカチオンとからなり、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する光酸発生剤と、第1アニオンと第1カチオンとからなる第1酸拡散制御剤と、第2アニオンと第2カチオンとからなる第2酸拡散制御剤と、を含み、
 光酸発生剤中の上記カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Aが、第1酸拡散制御剤の第1カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数B、及び第2酸拡散制御剤の第2カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Cのいずれよりも小さく、
 第1アニオンが置換基を有していてもよい多環の脂環構造を有し、多環の脂環構造を構成するメチレン基は-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよく、多環の脂環構造を構成するエチレン基はビニレン基で置換されていてもよく、多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
 第1アニオンのClogP値が-1.50以下であり、第2アニオンの体積が第1アニオンの体積よりも大きく、第2アニオンの体積が250Å以上である。
[Actinic ray- or radiation-sensitive resin composition (resist composition)]
The resist composition of the present invention will be described in detail below.
The resist composition of the present invention comprises: a resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid; a photoacid generator comprising an anion and a cation and generating an acid upon exposure to actinic rays or radiation; a first acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation; and a second acid diffusion controller comprising a second anion and a second cation;
the acid dissociation constant A of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation in the photoacid generator with a proton is smaller than both of the acid dissociation constant B of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the first cation in the first acid diffusion controller with a proton and the acid dissociation constant C of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the second cation in the second acid diffusion controller with a proton;
the first anion has a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -, an ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with a vinylene group, and when the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring;
The first anion has a ClogP value of −1.50 or less, the second anion has a volume greater than the volume of the first anion, and the second anion has a volume of 250 Å 3 or more.
 上記構成を有するレジスト組成物が本発明の課題を解決できる理由は必ずしも明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のとおり推測する。
 なお、下記推測により、効果が得られる機序が制限されるものではない。換言すれば、下記以外の機序により効果が得られる場合でも、本発明の範囲に含まれる。
 パターン形成において、露光により光酸発生剤から発生した酸が、未露光部において意図せず樹脂と反応することがLWR増加の一因として知られている。本発明のレジスト組成物は、上述の特定の2種の酸拡散制御剤を有することで、未露光部における酸と樹脂との反応が効果的に抑制できる。具体的には、体積が小さく、かつ、親水性が高い第1アニオンを有する第1酸拡散制御剤が、親水性の露光部と疎水性の未露光部との境界に移動し酸拡散を抑制し、更に、体積が大きく移動しにくい第2アニオンを有する第2酸拡散制御剤が、上記境界外の未露光部において酸拡散を抑制する。これにより、未露光部全体で酸と樹脂との反応が抑制でき、結果として、得られるパターンのLWRが低減できる。
Although the reason why the resist composition having the above-mentioned structure can solve the problems of the present invention is not necessarily clear, the present inventors speculate as follows.
The mechanism by which the effects are obtained is not limited by the following speculation. In other words, even if the effects are obtained by a mechanism other than the following, it is included in the scope of the present invention.
In pattern formation, it is known that an acid generated from a photoacid generator by exposure reacts unintentionally with a resin in an unexposed area, which is one of the causes of an increase in LWR. The resist composition of the present invention can effectively suppress the reaction between the acid and the resin in the unexposed area by containing the above-mentioned two specific acid diffusion control agents. Specifically, a first acid diffusion control agent having a small volume and a highly hydrophilic first anion moves to the boundary between the hydrophilic exposed area and the hydrophobic unexposed area to suppress acid diffusion, and a second acid diffusion control agent having a large volume and a second anion that is difficult to move suppresses acid diffusion in the unexposed area outside the boundary. This makes it possible to suppress the reaction between the acid and the resin in the entire unexposed area, and as a result, the LWR of the obtained pattern can be reduced.
〔特定樹脂〕
 本発明のレジスト組成物は、酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂(以下、「特定樹脂」ともいう。)を含む。
 特定樹脂は、酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基(以下、「酸分解性基」ともいう。)を有することが好ましく、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことがより好ましい。
 特定樹脂が酸分解性基を有する場合、本発明のパターン形成方法において、典型的には、現像液としてアルカリ現像液を採用した場合には、ポジ型パターンが好適に形成され、現像液として有機系現像液を採用した場合には、ネガ型パターンが好適に形成される。
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位、及び不飽和結合を含む酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
[Specific resin]
The resist composition of the present invention contains a resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid (hereinafter, also referred to as a "specific resin").
The specific resin preferably has a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to increase its polarity (hereinafter, also referred to as an "acid-decomposable group"), and more preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
When the specific resin has an acid-decomposable group, typically, in the pattern formation method of the present invention, when an alkaline developer is used as the developer, a positive pattern is preferably formed, and when an organic developer is used as the developer, a negative pattern is preferably formed.
Examples of the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group include a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group and a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond.
<酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。
 酸分解性基とは、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基をいう。酸分解性基は、酸の作用により脱離する基(脱離基)で極性基が保護された構造を有することが好ましい。
 つまり、特定樹脂は、酸の作用により分解し、極性基を生じる基を有する繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。この繰り返し単位を有する樹脂は、酸の作用により極性が増大してアルカリ現像液に対する溶解性が増大し、有機溶媒に対する溶解性が減少する。
<Repeating Unit Having Acid-Decomposable Group>
The specific resin preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
The acid-decomposable group refers to a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to generate a polar group. The acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected by a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid (a leaving group).
In other words, the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit having a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to generate a polar group, and the resin having this repeating unit has increased polarity under the action of an acid, thereby increasing its solubility in an alkaline developer and decreasing its solubility in an organic solvent.
 極性基としては、アルカリ可溶性基が好ましく、例えば、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド基、トリス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基等の酸性基、並びに、アルコール性水酸基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、極性基としては、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、又はスルホン酸基が好ましく、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基がより好ましい。
The polar group is preferably an alkali-soluble group, and examples thereof include acidic groups such as a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphate group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, an (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, an (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, a bis(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, a bis(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, a bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide group, a tris(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, and a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, as well as an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
Among these, the polar group is preferably a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group, and more preferably a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基としては、例えば、式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基が挙げられる。
式(Y1):-C(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y3):-C(R36)(R37)(OR38
式(Y4):-C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
Examples of the leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid include groups represented by the formulae (Y1) to (Y4).
Formula (Y1): -C(Rx 1 )(Rx 2 )(Rx 3 )
Formula (Y2): -C(=O)OC( Rx1 )( Rx2 )( Rx3 )
Formula (Y3): -C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 38 )
Formula (Y4): -C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
 式(Y1)及び式(Y2)中、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又はアリール基(単環若しくは多環)を表す。なお、Rx~Rxの全てがアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx~Rxのうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。
 なかでも、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基を表すことが好ましく、直鎖状のアルキル基を表すことがより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基としては、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及びt-ブチル基が挙げられる。
 上記シクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びに、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられる。
 上記アリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、及びアントリル基が挙げられる。
 上記アルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのうち2つが結合して、単環又は多環を形成してもよい。
 Rx~Rxのうち2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロアルキル基が好ましく、シクロペンチル基若しくはシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又はノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は炭素数6~12の多環のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのうち2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子、-CO-基、-SO-基、及び-SO-基等のヘテロ原子を含む基、又はビニリデン基で置換されていてもよい。また、上記シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上は、ビニレン基で置換されていてもよい。
 式(Y1)又は式(Y2)で表される基は、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
 レジスト組成物が、例えば、EUV露光用レジスト組成物である場合、Rx~Rxで表される基、及びRx~Rxの2つが結合して形成される環は、更に、置換基として、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していることも好ましい。
In formula (Y1) and formula (Y2), Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (linear or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). When all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
In particular, Rx 1 to Rx 3 each preferably independently represent an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and more preferably represent a linear alkyl group.
The alkyl group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
The aryl group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
The alkenyl group is preferably a vinyl group.
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocycle or polycycle.
The ring formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group, more preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group, and more preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
In the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx1 to Rx3 , one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group, or a vinylidene group. Also, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be substituted with a vinylene group.
In the group represented by formula (Y1) or formula (Y2), Rx1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx2 and Rx3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
When the resist composition is, for example, a resist composition for EUV exposure, it is also preferable that the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 and the rings formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 further have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
 式(Y3)中、R36~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。R37とR38とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 1価の有機基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基の好適態様は、上述のRx~Rxで表される各基と同様である。
 R36は水素原子であることも好ましい。
 上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基において、メチレン基の1つ以上が酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子、-CO-基、-SO-基、及び-SO-基等のヘテロ原子を含む基で置換されていてもよい。
 R38は、繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基と互いに結合して、環を形成してもよい。R38と繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基とが互いに結合して形成する基は、メチレン基等のアルキレン基が好ましい。
 レジスト組成物が、例えば、EUV露光用レジスト組成物である場合、R36~R38で表される基、及びR37とR38とが結合して形成される環は、更に、置換基として、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していることも好ましい。
In formula (Y3), R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 37 and R 38 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
Examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group.
The preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group and aralkyl group are the same as those of the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 above.
It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
In the above alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups, one or more methylene groups may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, or a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, -SO 2 - group or -SO 3 - group.
R 38 may be bonded to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring. The group formed by bonding R 38 to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
When the resist composition is, for example, a resist composition for EUV exposure, it is also preferable that the groups represented by R 36 to R 38 and the ring formed by bonding R 37 and R 38 further have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
 式(Y4)中、Arは、芳香環基を表す。Rnは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。RnとArとは互いに結合して非芳香族環を形成してもよい。Arとしては、アリール基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、及びアリール基の好適態様は、上述のRx~Rxで表される各基と同様である。
 レジスト組成物が、例えば、EUV露光用レジスト組成物である場合、Arで表される基及びRnで表される基は、置換基としてフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していることも好ましい。
In formula (Y4), Ar represents an aromatic ring group. Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. Rn and Ar may be bonded to each other to form a non-aromatic ring. Ar is preferably an aryl group.
The preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group are the same as those of the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 above.
When the resist composition is, for example, a resist composition for EUV exposure, it is preferable that the group represented by Ar and the group represented by Rn each have a fluorine atom or iodine atom as a substituent.
 繰り返し単位の酸分解性が優れる点から、極性基を保護する脱離基において、極性基(又はその残基)に非芳香族環が直接結合している場合、上記非芳香族環中の、上記極性基(又はその残基)と直接結合している環員原子に隣接する環員原子は、置換基としてフッ素原子等のハロゲン原子を有さないことも好ましい。 In terms of excellent acid decomposition properties of the repeating unit, when a non-aromatic ring is directly bonded to the polar group (or a residue thereof) in the leaving group protecting the polar group, it is also preferable that the ring atom in the non-aromatic ring adjacent to the ring atom directly bonded to the polar group (or a residue thereof) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
 酸の作用により脱離する基は、3-メチル-2-シクロペンテニル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有する2-シクロペンテニル基、及び1,1,4,4-テトラメチルシクロヘキシル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有するシクロヘキシル基であってもよい。 The group that is eliminated by the action of an acid may be a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (such as an alkyl group), such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, or a cyclohexyl group having a substituent (such as an alkyl group), such as a 1,1,4,4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 The repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (A).
 Lは2価の連結基を表し、Rは水素原子、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表し、Rは酸の作用によって脱離する脱離基を表す。 L1 represents a divalent linking group, R1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R2 represents a leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid.
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、2価の炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びアリーレン基等)、及びこれらの複数が連結した連結基が挙げられる。
 上記2価の炭化水素基は、置換基としてフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい。
 なかでも、Lとしては、-CO-、-Rt-、-COO-Rt-、-COO-Rt-CO-、又は-Rt-CO-が好ましく、-CO-又は-COO-Rt-CO-がより好ましい。Rtは2価の炭化水素基であり、アルキレン基又はアリーレン基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましい。
 アルキレン基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐鎖状であってもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 上記アルキレン基が有していてもよいフッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の合計数は特に制限されないが、2以上が好ましく、2~10がより好ましく、3~6が更に好ましい。
 アリーレン基としては、フェニレン基が好ましい。
L1 represents a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, divalent hydrocarbon groups (e.g., alkylene groups, cycloalkylene groups, alkenylene groups, arylene groups, etc.), and linking groups in which a plurality of these are linked together.
The divalent hydrocarbon group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
Among these, L1 is preferably -CO-, -Rt-, -COO-Rt-, -COO-Rt-CO- or -Rt-CO-, and more preferably -CO- or -COO-Rt-CO-. Rt is a divalent hydrocarbon group, preferably an alkylene group or an arylene group, and more preferably an alkylene group.
The alkylene group may be linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
The total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms that the alkylene group may have is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 2 to 10, and even more preferably 3 to 6.
The arylene group is preferably a phenylene group.
 Rは水素原子、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。上記アルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基としてフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基が有していてもよいフッ素原子及びヨウ素原子の合計数は特に制限されないが、1以上が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子を有していてもよい。
R1 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. The alkyl group and the aryl group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
The alkyl group may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
The total number of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms which the alkyl group may have is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 1 to 3.
The alkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom.
 Rは、酸の作用によって脱離する脱離基を表す。上記脱離基は、置換基としてフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい。
 上記脱離基としては、上述した式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される脱離基が挙げられる。
R2 represents a leaving group which is eliminated by the action of an acid. The leaving group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom as a substituent.
Examples of the leaving group include the leaving groups represented by the above formulae (Y1) to (Y4).
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位がより好ましい。 The repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (AI).
 式(AI)中、Xaは、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。Tは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環又は多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)、又はアリール基(単環又は多環)を表す。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して、単環又は多環(単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基等)を形成してもよい。
In formula (AI), Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Rx1 to Rx3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (linear or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (eg, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group).
 Xaは、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。
 上記置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基又は-CH-R11で表される基が挙げられる。R11は、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、又は1価の有機基を表す。上記1価の有機基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数5以下のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数5以下のアシル基、及びハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数5以下のアルコキシ基が挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。
 Xaとしては、水素原子、メチル基、トリフルオロメチル基、又はヒドロキシメチル基が好ましい。
Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent include a methyl group or a group represented by -CH 2 -R 11. R 11 represents a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a monovalent organic group. Examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, an acyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group having 5 or less carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom. An alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferred, and a methyl group is more preferred.
Xa1 is preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a hydroxymethyl group.
 Tは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、芳香環基、-COO-Rt-、及び-O-Rt-が挙げられる。Rtは、アルキレン基又はシクロアルキレン基を表す。
 Tとしては、単結合又は-COO-Rt-が好ましい。
 Rtとしては、炭素数1~5のアルキレン基が好ましく、メチレン基、エチレン基、又はプロピレン基がより好ましい。
T represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an aromatic ring group, -COO-Rt-, and -O-Rt-, where Rt represents an alkylene group or a cycloalkylene group.
T is preferably a single bond or --COO--Rt--.
Rt is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, or a propylene group.
 Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環又は多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)、又はアリール基(単環又は多環)を表す。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して、単環又は多環(単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基等)を形成してもよい。
 上記Rx~Rxで表されるアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、及びアリール基の好適態様は、式(Y1)及び式(Y2)におけるRx~Rxで表される各基と同様である。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又はノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。なかでも、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基又は炭素数6~12の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子、-CO-基、-SO-基、及び-SO-基等のヘテロ原子を含む基、又はビニリデン基で置換されていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置換されていてもよい。
 式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位は、例えば、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxで表される基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、及び炭素数2~6のアルコキシカルボニル基が挙げられる。
Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (straight-chain or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group (straight-chain or branched), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (eg, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group).
Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group and aryl group represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 are the same as the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 in formulae (Y1) and (Y2).
The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx1 to Rx3 is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group. Of these, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable.
In the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx1 to Rx3 , for example, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be substituted with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, a -SO2- group, or a -SO3- group, or a vinylidene group. Furthermore, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be substituted with a vinylene group.
In the repeating unit represented by formula (AI), for example, Rx1 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx2 and Rx3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group.
The groups represented by Rx1 to Rx3 may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位としては、酸分解性(メタ)アクリル酸3級アルキルエステル系繰り返し単位(Xaが水素原子又はメチル基を表し、かつ、Tが単結合又は-COO-Rt-を表す繰り返し単位)が好ましい。 The repeating unit represented by formula (AI) is preferably an acid-decomposable tertiary alkyl (meth)acrylate repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xa1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and T represents a single bond or -COO-Rt-).
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、国際公開第2020/158467号の段落[0053]~[0057]に記載の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of repeating units having an acid-decomposable group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0053] to [0057] of WO 2020/158467.
 特定樹脂は、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位として、不飽和結合を含む酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 不飽和結合を含む酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(B)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。
The specific resin may have, as the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group, a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond.
As the repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond, a repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(B)において、Xbは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。Lは、単結合又は置換基を有してもよい2価の連結基を表す。Ry~Ryは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、単環若しくは多環のシクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、又は単環若しくは多環のアリール基を表す。ただし、Ry~Ryのうち少なくとも1つはアルケニル基、アルキニル基、単環若しくは多環のシクロアルケニル基、又は単環若しくは多環のアリール基を表す。
 Ry~Ryの2つが結合して、単環又は多環(単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基等)を形成してもよい。
In formula (B), Xb represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent. L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group which may have a substituent. Ry 1 to Ry 3 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic aryl group. However, at least one of Ry 1 to Ry 3 represents an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkenyl group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic aryl group.
Two of Ry 1 to Ry 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (such as a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group).
 Xbは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。
 Xbの好適態様は、式(AI)中におけるXaと同様である。
Xb represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group which may have a substituent.
The preferred embodiments of Xb are the same as those of Xa1 in formula (AI).
 Lは、単結合又は置換基を有してもよい2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、-Rt-基、-CO-基、-COO-Rt-基、-COO-Rt-CO-基、-Rt-CO-基、及び-O-Rt-基が挙げられる。
 Rtは、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又は芳香環基を表し、芳香環基が好ましい。Rtは、置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及びアルコキシ基等が挙げられる。
 Lとしては、-Rt-基、-CO-基、-COO-Rt-CO-基、又は-Rt-CO-基が好ましい。
L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group which may have a substituent.
Examples of the divalent linking group include a -Rt- group, a -CO- group, a -COO-Rt- group, a -COO-Rt-CO- group, a -Rt-CO- group, and a -O-Rt- group.
Rt represents an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or an aromatic ring group, and is preferably an aromatic ring group. Rt may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and an alkoxy group.
L is preferably a -Rt- group, a -CO- group, a -COO-Rt-CO- group, or a -Rt-CO- group.
 Ry~Ryは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環又は多環)、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、シクロアルケニル基(単環又は多環)、又はアリール基(単環又は多環)を表す。ただし、Ry~Ryのうち少なくとも1つはアルケニル基、アルキニル基、シクロアルケニル基(単環又は多環)、又はアリール基(単環又は多環)を表す。
 Ry~Ryの2つが結合して、単環又は多環(単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基、シクロアルケニル基等)を形成してもよい。
 上記Ry~Ryで表されるアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アルケニル基、及びアリール基の好適態様は、式(Y-1)中におけるRx~Rxで表される各基と同様である。
 Ry~Ryで表されるアルキニル基としては、エチニル基が好ましい。
 Ry~Ryで表されるシクロアルケニル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基の一部に二重結合を含む構造が好ましい。
 Ry~Ryの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基又はシクロアルケニル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子及び硫黄原子等のヘテロ原子、-CO-基、-SO-基及び-SO-基等のヘテロ原子を含む基、ビニリデン基、又はそれらの組み合わせで置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基又はシクロアルケニル基は、シクロアルカン環又はシクロアルケン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位は、例えば、Ryがメチル基、エチル基、ビニル基、アリル基、又はアリール基であり、RyとRyとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基又はシクロアルケニル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
Ry 1 to Ry 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkenyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), provided that at least one of Ry 1 to Ry 3 represents an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkenyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), or an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
Two of Ry 1 to Ry 3 may be bonded to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring (such as a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group).
Preferred embodiments of the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group and aryl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 above are the same as the groups represented by Rx 1 to Rx 3 in formula (Y-1).
The alkynyl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 is preferably an ethynyl group.
As the cycloalkenyl group represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 , a structure containing a double bond in a part of a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group is preferable.
In the cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group formed by combining two of Ry1 to Ry3 , for example, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, a group containing a heteroatom such as a -CO- group, an -SO2- group or an -SO3- group, a vinylidene group, or a combination thereof. Furthermore, in these cycloalkyl groups or cycloalkenyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring or cycloalkene ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
In the repeating unit represented by formula (B), for example, Ry1 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, a vinyl group, an allyl group, or an aryl group, and Ry2 and Ry3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group or cycloalkenyl group.
 Ry~Ryで表される基が置換基を有する場合、置換基としては、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、及び炭素数2~6のアルコキシカルボニル基が好ましい。 When the groups represented by Ry 1 to Ry 3 have a substituent, the substituent is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位としては、酸分解性(メタ)アクリル酸3級エステル系繰り返し単位(Xbが水素原子又はメチル基を表し、かつ、Lが-CO-基を表す繰り返し単位)、酸分解性ヒドロキシスチレン3級アルキルエーテル系繰り返し単位(Xbが水素原子又はメチル基を表し、かつ、Lがフェニル基を表す繰り返し単位)、又は酸分解性スチレンカルボン酸3級エステル系繰り返し単位(Xbが水素原子又はメチル基を表し、かつ、Lが-Ar-CO-基(Arは芳香族基)を表す繰り返し単位)が好ましい。 The repeating unit represented by formula (B) is preferably an acid-decomposable (meth)acrylic acid tertiary ester repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a -CO- group), an acid-decomposable hydroxystyrene tertiary alkyl ether repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a phenyl group), or an acid-decomposable styrene carboxylic acid tertiary ester repeating unit (a repeating unit in which Xb represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and L represents a -Ar-CO- group (Ar is an aromatic group)).
 特定樹脂が、不飽和結合を含む酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、その含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、15~80モル%が好ましく、20~70モル%がより好ましく、30~60モル%が更に好ましい。 When the specific resin contains a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group containing an unsaturated bond, the content is preferably 15 to 80 mol %, more preferably 20 to 70 mol %, and even more preferably 30 to 60 mol %, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
 酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、15モル%以上が好ましく、20モル%以上がより好ましく、30モル%以上が更に好ましい。上限としては、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、90モル%以下が好ましく、80モル%以下がより好ましく、70モル%以下が更に好ましく、60モル%以下が特に好ましい。 The content of the repeating units having an acid-decomposable group is preferably 15 mol% or more, more preferably 20 mol% or more, and even more preferably 30 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin. The upper limit is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, even more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
 特定樹脂は、以下のA群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位、及び/又は以下のB群からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
A群:以下の(20)~(25)の繰り返し単位からなる群。
(20)後述する、酸基を有する繰り返し単位
(21)後述する、酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位
(22)後述する、ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位(23)後述する、光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位
(24)後述する、式(V-1)又は下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位
(25)主鎖の運動性を低下させるための繰り返し単位
B群:以下の(30)~(32)の繰り返し単位からなる群。
(30)後述する、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位
(31)後述する、脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位
(32)後述する、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位
The specific resin may contain at least one type of repeating unit selected from the group consisting of Group A below, and/or at least one type of repeating unit selected from the group consisting of Group B below.
Group A: A group consisting of the following repeating units (20) to (25).
(20) A repeating unit having an acid group, as described below (21) A repeating unit having neither an acid decomposable group nor an acid group, and having a fluorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, as described below (22) A repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group or a carbonate group, as described below (23) A repeating unit having a photoacid generating group, as described below (24) A repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2), as described below (25) Group B of repeating units for reducing mobility of the main chain: a group consisting of the following repeating units (30) to (32).
(30) A repeating unit having at least one group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group, as described below. (31) A repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and not exhibiting acid decomposability, as described below. (32) A repeating unit represented by formula (III), as described below, which has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
 特定樹脂は、酸基を有していることが好ましく、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。特定樹脂が酸基を有する場合、特定樹脂と光酸発生剤から発生する酸との相互作用性がより優れる。この結果として、酸の拡散がより一層抑制されて、形成されるパターンの断面形状がより矩形化し得る。 The specific resin preferably has an acid group, and preferably contains a repeating unit having an acid group. When the specific resin has an acid group, the interaction between the specific resin and the acid generated from the photoacid generator is superior. As a result, the diffusion of the acid is further suppressed, and the cross-sectional shape of the formed pattern can become more rectangular.
 特定樹脂は、レジスト組成物がEUV露光用途として用いられる場合、上記A群から選択される少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、レジスト組成物がEUV露光用途として用いられる場合、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有することも好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、レジスト組成物がArF露光用途として用いられる場合、上記B群から選択される1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、レジスト組成物がArF露光用途として用いられる場合、フッ素原子、及びケイ素原子のいずれも有しないことも好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、レジスト組成物がArF露光用途として用いられる場合、芳香族基を有しないことも好ましい。
When the resist composition is used for EUV exposure, the specific resin preferably has at least one type of repeating unit selected from Group A above.
When the resist composition is used for EUV exposure, the specific resin also preferably contains a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, the specific resin preferably has one type of repeating unit selected from Group B above.
When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, it is also preferable that the specific resin contains neither fluorine atoms nor silicon atoms.
When the resist composition is used for ArF exposure, it is also preferable that the specific resin does not contain an aromatic group.
<酸基を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 上記酸基の酸解離定数は、13以下が好ましく、10以下がより好ましく、下限としては、3以上が好ましく、5以上がより好ましい。
 特定樹脂中における酸基の含有量は特に制限されないが、0.2~6.0mmol/gの場合が多い。なかでも、0.8~6.0mmol/gが好ましく、1.2~5.0mmol/gがより好ましく、1.6~4.0mmol/gが更に好ましい。酸基の含有量が上記範囲内であれば、現像が良好に進行し、形成されるパターン形状及び解像性がより優れる。
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、スルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基、又はイソプロパノール基が好ましい。
 上記ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基は、フッ素原子の1つ以上(好ましくは1~2つ)が、フッ素原子以外の基(アルコキシカルボニル基等)で置換されてもよい。
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位、及び後述するラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位とは異なる構造を有することが好ましい。
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有していてもよい。
<Repeating Unit Having an Acid Group>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit having an acid group.
The acid dissociation constant of the acid group is preferably 13 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and the lower limit is preferably 3 or more, more preferably 5 or more.
The content of the acid group in the specific resin is not particularly limited, but is often 0.2 to 6.0 mmol/g. Among them, 0.8 to 6.0 mmol/g is preferable, 1.2 to 5.0 mmol/g is more preferable, and 1.6 to 4.0 mmol/g is even more preferable. When the content of the acid group is within the above range, development proceeds well, and the formed pattern shape and resolution are more excellent.
The acid group is preferably, for example, a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamide group, or an isopropanol group.
In the hexafluoroisopropanol group, one or more (preferably one or two) fluorine atoms may be substituted with a group other than a fluorine atom (such as an alkoxycarbonyl group).
The repeating unit having an acid group preferably has a structure different from that of a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group and a repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group, which will be described later.
The repeating unit having an acid group may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記式(1)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 The repeating unit having an acid group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (1):
 式(1)中、Aは水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、又はシアノ基を表す。
 Rは、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルケニル基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、アルキルスルホニルオキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、又はアリールオキシカルボニル基を表す。複数のRを有する場合、Rはそれぞれ同じであっても異なっていてもよく、互いに共同して環を形成していてもよい。Rとしては、水素原子が好ましい。
 aは1~3の整数を表す。bは0~(5-a)の整数を表す。
In formula (1), A represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
R represents a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkenyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylsulfonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group. When there are multiple R, R may be the same or different, and may form a ring together. R is preferably a hydrogen atom.
a represents an integer of 1 to 3. b represents an integer of 0 to (5-a).
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、国際公開第2020/158467号の段落[0081]~[0086]に記載の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of repeating units having an acid group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0081] to [0086] of WO 2020/158467.
 酸基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、10モル%以上が好ましく、15モル%以上がより好ましい。また、上限としては、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、70モル%以下が好ましく、65モル%以下がより好ましく、60モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of repeating units having an acid group is preferably 10 mol% or more, and more preferably 15 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin. The upper limit is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 65 mol% or less, and even more preferably 60 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
<酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子、又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、上述した<酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位>及び<酸基を有する繰り返し単位>とは異なる、酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位(以下、「単位X」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。単位Xは、後述の<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>、及び<光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位>等の、A群に属する他の種類の繰り返し単位とは異なることが好ましい。
<Repeating Unit Having Neither an Acid-Decomposable Group nor an Acid Group and Having a Fluorine Atom, a Bromine Atom, or an Iodine Atom>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit X") that has neither an acid decomposable group nor an acid group and has a fluorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom, which is different from the above-mentioned <repeating unit having an acid decomposable group> and <repeating unit having an acid group>. It is preferable that the unit X is different from other types of repeating units belonging to group A, such as the <repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group or a carbonate group> and the <repeating unit having a photoacid generating group> described below.
 単位Xとしては、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 The repeating unit X is preferably a repeating unit represented by formula (C).
 Lは、単結合、又は-COO-を表す。Rは、水素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。R10は、水素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。 L5 represents a single bond or -COO-. R9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. R10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, an aryl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or a group which combines these.
 単位Xとしては、例えば、国際公開第2020/158467号の段落[0093]に記載の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the unit X include the repeating units described in paragraph [0093] of WO 2020/158467.
 単位Xの含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、0モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましく、10モル%以上が更に好ましい。また、上限としては、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、50モル%以下が好ましく、45モル%以下がより好ましく、40モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of unit X is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, and even more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the specific resin. The upper limit is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, and even more preferably 40 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、及びカーボネート基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する繰り返し単位(以下、「単位Y」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。
 単位Yは、水酸基及びヘキサフルオロプロパノール基等の酸基を有さないことも好ましい。
<Repeating Unit Having a Lactone Group, a Sultone Group, or a Carbonate Group>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit Y") having at least one type selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group.
It is also preferred that the unit Y does not have a hydroxyl group or an acid group such as a hexafluoropropanol group.
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基としては、ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造を有していればよい。ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造は、5~7員環ラクトン構造又は5~7員環スルトン構造が好ましい。なかでも、ビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環ラクトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているもの、又はビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環スルトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているものがより好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、下記式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造、又は下記式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるラクトン基又はスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位を有することが好ましく、ラクトン基又はスルトン基が主鎖に直接結合していてもよい。例えば、ラクトン基又はスルトン基の環員原子が、特定樹脂の主鎖を構成してもよい。
The lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or sultone structure. The lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered sultone structure. Among them, a 5- to 7-membered lactone structure having another ring structure condensed thereto in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure, or a 5- to 7-membered sultone structure having another ring structure condensed thereto in the form of a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure, is more preferred.
The specific resin preferably has a repeating unit having a lactone group or sultone group obtained by removing one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom of a lactone structure represented by any one of the following formulae (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a sultone structure represented by any one of the following formulae (SL1-1) to (SL1-3), and the lactone group or sultone group may be directly bonded to the main chain. For example, the ring member atom of the lactone group or sultone group may constitute the main chain of the specific resin.
 上記ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造は、置換基(Rb)を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基(Rb)としては、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数4~7のシクロアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基、カルボキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、及び酸分解性基が挙げられる。n2は、0~4の整数を表す。n2が2以上の時、複数存在するRbは、異なっていてもよく、複数存在するRb同士が結合して環を形成してもよい。 The lactone structure or sultone structure may have a substituent (Rb 2 ). Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a carboxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, and an acid-decomposable group. n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, the multiple Rb 2s may be different from each other, or the multiple Rb 2s may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造、又は式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造を含む基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記式(AI)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 An example of a repeating unit having a group containing a lactone structure represented by any one of formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) or a sultone structure represented by any one of formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3) is a repeating unit represented by the following formula (AI).
 式(AI)中、Rbは、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。Rbのアルキル基が有していてもよい好ましい置換基としては、水酸基及びハロゲン原子が挙げられる。上記ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 Rbとしては、水素原子又はメチル基が好ましい。
 Abは、単結合、アルキレン基、単環又は多環の脂環式炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボキシ基、又はこれらを組み合わせた2価の連結基を表す。Abとしては、単結合、又は-Ab-CO-で表される連結基が好ましい。Abは、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキレン基、又は単環若しくは多環のシクロアルキレン基であり、メチレン基、エチレン基、シクロヘキシレン基、アダマンチレン基、又はノルボルニレン基が好ましい。
 Vは、式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基、又は式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基を表す。
In formula (AI), Rb 0 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Preferred substituents that the alkyl group of Rb 0 may have include a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom. Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
Rb0 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Ab represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, or a divalent linking group combining these. Ab is preferably a single bond or a linking group represented by -Ab 1 -CO 2 -. Ab 1 is a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, and is preferably a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, an adamantylene group, or a norbornylene group.
V represents a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom of a lactone structure represented by any of formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21), or a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom of a sultone structure represented by any of formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3).
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位に、光学異性体が存在する場合、いずれの光学異性体を用いてもよい。また、1種の光学異性体を単独で用いても、複数の光学異性体を混合して用いてもよい。1種の光学異性体を主に用いる場合、その光学純度(ee)は90以上が好ましく、95以上がより好ましい。 When optical isomers exist in the repeating unit having a lactone group or a sultone group, any optical isomer may be used. In addition, one optical isomer may be used alone, or multiple optical isomers may be used in combination. When one optical isomer is mainly used, the optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, and more preferably 95 or more.
 カーボネート基としては、環状炭酸エステル基が好ましい。 The carbonate group is preferably a cyclic carbonate ester group.
 環状炭酸エステル基を有する繰り返し単位としては、下記式(A-1)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 The repeating unit having a cyclic carbonate group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A-1).
 式(A-1)中、R は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、又は1価の有機基(好ましくはメチル基)を表す。nは0以上の整数を表す。R は、置換基を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数存在するR は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。Aは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。上記2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、単環又は多環の脂環式炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボキシ基、又はこれらを組み合わせた2価の連結基が好ましい。Zは、式中の-O-CO-O-で表される基と共に単環又は多環を形成する原子団を表す。 In formula (A-1), R A 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a monovalent organic group (preferably a methyl group). n represents an integer of 0 or more. R A 2 represents a substituent. When n is 2 or more, a plurality of R A 2 may be the same or different. A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. As the divalent linking group, an alkylene group, a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxy group, or a divalent linking group formed by combining these is preferable. Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring together with the group represented by -O-CO-O- in the formula.
 単位Yを以下に例示する。式中、Rxは、水素原子、-CH、-CHOH又はCFを表す。 Examples of the unit Y are shown below: In the formula, Rx represents a hydrogen atom, -CH3 , -CH2OH or CF3 .
 単位Yの含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、1モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限としては、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、85モル%以下が好ましく、80モル%以下がより好ましく、70モル%以下が更に好ましく、60モル%以下が特に好ましい。 The content of the unit Y is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the specific resin. The upper limit is preferably 85 mol% or less, more preferably 80 mol% or less, even more preferably 70 mol% or less, and particularly preferably 60 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the specific resin.
<光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、上記以外の繰り返し単位として、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する基(以下、「光酸発生基」ともいう)を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(4)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
<Repeating Unit Having Photoacid Generating Group>
The specific resin may contain, as a repeating unit other than the above, a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation (hereinafter, also referred to as a "photoacid generating group").
An example of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
 R41は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。L41は、単結合、又は2価の連結基を表す。L42は、2価の連結基を表す。R40は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解して側鎖に酸を発生させる構造部位を表す。
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。
R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. L 42 represents a divalent linking group. R 40 represents a structural moiety that is decomposed by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation to generate an acid in a side chain.
Examples of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group are shown below.
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-041327号公報の段落[0094]~[0105]に記載された繰り返し単位、及び国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0094]に記載された繰り返し単位も挙げられる。 Examples of repeating units having a photoacid generating group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP2014-041327A and the repeating unit described in paragraph [0094] of WO2018/193954.
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、1モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限としては、特定樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対して、40モル%以下が好ましく、35モル%以下がより好ましく、30モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more, and more preferably 5 mol% or more, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin. The upper limit is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less, based on the total repeating units in the specific resin.
<式(V-1)又は下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、下記式(V-1)、又は下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 下記式(V-1)、及び下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位は上述の繰り返し単位とは異なる繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
<Repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2)>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2).
The repeating units represented by the following formulae (V-1) and (V-2) are preferably repeating units different from the repeating units described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 式中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR又は-COOR:Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシ基を表す。アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐鎖状又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 n3は、0~6の整数を表す。
 n4は、0~4の整数を表す。
 Xは、メチレン基、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子である。
 式(V-1)又は(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0100]に記載された繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
In the formula, R6 and R7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R is an alkyl group or a fluorinated alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), or a carboxy group. As the alkyl group, a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
n3 represents an integer of 0 to 6.
n4 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
X4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) include the repeating units described in paragraph [0100] of WO 2018/193954.
<主鎖の運動性を低下させるための繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、発生酸の過剰な拡散又は現像時のパターン崩壊を抑制できる点から、ガラス転移温度(Tg)が高いことが好ましい。Tgは、90℃超が好ましく、100℃超がより好ましく、110℃超が更に好ましく、125℃以上が特に好ましい。上限としては、現像液への溶解速度が優れる点から、400℃以下が好ましく、350℃以下がより好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、特定樹脂等のポリマーのTgは、以下の方法で算出する。まず、ポリマー中に含まれる各繰り返し単位のみからなるホモポリマーのTgを、Bicerano法によりそれぞれ算出する。次に、ポリマー中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の質量割合(%)を算出する。次に、Foxの式(Materials Letters 62(2008)3152等に記載)を用いて各質量割合におけるTgを算出して、それらを総和して、ポリマーのTg(℃)とする。
 Bicerano法は、Prediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York(1993)に記載されている。Bicerano法によるTgの算出は、ポリマーの物性概算ソフトウェアMDL Polymer(MDL Information Systems, Inc.)を用いて行うことができる。
<Repeating units for reducing main chain mobility>
The specific resin preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) in order to suppress excessive diffusion of the generated acid or pattern collapse during development. The Tg is preferably higher than 90° C., more preferably higher than 100° C., even more preferably higher than 110° C., and particularly preferably 125° C. or higher. The upper limit is preferably 400° C. or lower, more preferably 350° C. or lower, in order to provide an excellent dissolution rate in the developer.
In this specification, the Tg of a polymer such as a specific resin is calculated by the following method. First, the Tg of a homopolymer consisting of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method. Next, the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to the total repeating units in the polymer is calculated. Next, the Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using the Fox formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and these are summed up to obtain the Tg (°C) of the polymer.
The Bicerano method is described in Prediction of Polymer Properties, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York (1993). The calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using polymer property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
 特定樹脂のTgを大きくする(好ましくは、Tgを90℃超とする)には、特定樹脂の主鎖の運動性を低下させることが好ましい。特定樹脂の主鎖の運動性を低下させる方法は、以下の(a)~(e)の方法が挙げられる。
(a)主鎖への嵩高い置換基の導入
(b)主鎖への複数の置換基の導入
(c)主鎖近傍への特定樹脂間の相互作用を誘発する置換基の導入
(d)環状構造での主鎖形成
(e)主鎖への環状構造の連結
 なお、特定樹脂は、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
In order to increase the Tg of the specific resin (preferably to make the Tg exceed 90° C.), it is preferable to reduce the mobility of the main chain of the specific resin. Methods for reducing the mobility of the main chain of the specific resin include the following methods (a) to (e).
(a) introduction of a bulky substituent into the main chain; (b) introduction of a plurality of substituents into the main chain; (c) introduction of a substituent inducing an interaction between specific resins into the vicinity of the main chain; (d) formation of a main chain with a cyclic structure; (e) linking of a cyclic structure to the main chain. Note that the specific resin preferably has a repeating unit showing a homopolymer Tg of 130° C. or higher.
 上記を達成する具体的な手段の一例としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0107]~[0133]に記載の繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 One example of a specific means for achieving the above is the method of introducing the repeating units described in paragraphs [0107] to [0133] of WO 2018/193954.
<ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 特定樹脂が有するラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位としては、上述した<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>で説明した繰り返し単位が挙げられる。好ましい含有量も上述した<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>で説明した通りである。
<Repeating Unit Having at Least One Group Selected from Lactone Group, Sultone Group, Carbonate Group, Hydroxyl Group, Cyano Group, and Alkali-Soluble Group>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit having at least one type of group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group contained in the specific resin include the repeating units described above in <Repeat units having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group>. The preferred content is also as described above in <Repeat units having a lactone group, a sultone group, or a carbonate group>.
 特定樹脂は、基板密着性、現像液親和性がより向上する点で、水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位としては、水酸基又はシアノ基で置換された脂環式炭化水素構造を有する繰り返し単位が好ましい。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有さないことが好ましい。水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0081]~[0084]に記載のものが挙げられる。
The specific resin may have a repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group, in order to further improve the adhesion to the substrate and the affinity for the developer.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group preferably does not have an acid-decomposable group. Examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0081] to [0084] of JP2014-098921A.
 特定樹脂は、アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、ビススルホニルイミド基、及びα位が電子求引性基で置換された脂肪族アルコール基(例えば、ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。特定樹脂がアルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、コンタクトホール用途での解像性が増す。アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0085]及び[0086]に記載のものが挙げられる。
The specific resin may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the alkali-soluble group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bissulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol group (e.g., a hexafluoroisopropanol group) in which the α-position is substituted with an electron-withdrawing group, and the carboxy group is preferred. The specific resin contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, thereby increasing the resolution in contact hole applications. Examples of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group include those described in paragraphs [0085] and [0086] of JP2014-098921A.
<脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位を有してもよい。これにより液浸露光時にレジスト膜から液浸液への低分子成分の溶出が低減できる。脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位として、例えば、1-アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジアマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカニル(メタ)アクリレート、又はシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
<Repeating Unit Having an Alicyclic Hydrocarbon Structure and Not Showing Acid Decomposability>
The specific resin may have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and a repeating unit that does not exhibit acid decomposability. This can reduce elution of low molecular weight components from the resist film into the immersion liquid during immersion exposure. Examples of repeating units that have an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and do not exhibit acid decomposability include repeating units derived from 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, diamantyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth)acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
<水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
<Repeating unit represented by formula (III) having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group>
The specific resin may have a repeating unit represented by formula (III) that has neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
 式(III)中、Rは少なくとも1つの環状構造を有し、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない炭化水素基を表す。
 Raは水素原子、アルキル基又は-CH-O-Ra基を表す。式中、Raは、水素原子、アルキル基又はアシル基を表す。
 水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0087]~[0094]に記載の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
In formula (III), R5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a -CH 2 -O-Ra 2 group, where Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group.
Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (III) that does not have either a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include the repeating units described in paragraphs [0087] to [0094] of JP2014-098921A.
<その他の繰り返し単位>
 特定樹脂は、上述した繰り返し単位以外のその他の繰り返し単位を有してもよい。
 例えば特定樹脂は、オキサチアン環基を有する繰り返し単位、オキサゾロン環基を有する繰り返し単位、ジオキサン環基を有する繰り返し単位、及びヒダントイン環基を有する繰り返し単位からなる群から選択される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
<Other repeating units>
The specific resin may have repeating units other than the repeating units described above.
For example, the specific resin may have a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxathiane ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantoin ring group.
 特定樹脂は、上記の繰り返し構造単位以外に、ドライエッチング耐性、標準現像液適性、基板密着性、レジストプロファイル、解像性、耐熱性、及び感度等を調節する目的で様々な繰り返し構造単位を有していてもよい。 In addition to the repeating structural units described above, the specific resin may have various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, suitability for standard developing solutions, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, etc.
 特定樹脂は、常法に従って(例えばラジカル重合)合成できる。
 GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、特定樹脂の重量平均分子量は、30000以下が好ましく、1000~30000がより好ましく、3000~30000が更に好ましく、5000~15000が特に好ましい。
 特定樹脂の多分散度(PDI)は、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1.2~3.0が更に好ましく、1.2~2.0が特に好ましい。多分散度が小さいものほど、解像性、及びレジスト形状がより優れ、更に、レジストパターンの側壁がよりスムーズであり、ラフネス性にもより優れる。
The specific resin can be synthesized according to a conventional method (for example, radical polymerization).
The weight average molecular weight of the specific resin, as calculated as polystyrene by the GPC method, is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 to 30,000, even more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, and particularly preferably 5,000 to 15,000.
The polydispersity index (PDI) of the specific resin is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3, even more preferably from 1.2 to 3.0, and particularly preferably from 1.2 to 2.0. The smaller the polydispersity index, the better the resolution and resist shape, and furthermore, the smoother the sidewalls of the resist pattern are, and the better the roughness is.
 特定樹脂の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、40.0~99.9質量%が好ましく、60.0~90.0質量%がより好ましい。
 特定樹脂は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
The content of the specific resin is preferably from 40.0 to 99.9 mass %, and more preferably from 60.0 to 90.0 mass %, based on the total solid content of the resist composition.
The specific resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 レジスト組成物は、アニオンとカチオンとからなり、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する光酸発生剤を含む。
 上記光酸発生剤は、上記カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数A(pKa(A))が、後述する第1酸拡散制御剤の第1カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数B(pKa(B))、及び後述する第2酸拡散制御剤の第2カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数C(pKa(C))のいずれよりも小さい化合物である。つまり、酸解離定数Aが酸解離定数Bよりも小さく、かつ、酸解離定数Aが酸解離定数Cよりも小さい。
 光酸発生剤は、低分子化合物の形態であってもよく、重合体(例えば、上述の特定樹脂)の一部に組み込まれた形態であってもよい。また、低分子化合物の形態と重合体の一部に組み込まれた形態とを併用してもよい。
 光酸発生剤が、低分子化合物の形態である場合、光酸発生剤の分子量は3000以下が好ましく、2000以下がより好ましく、1000以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、100以上が好ましい。
 光酸発生剤は、低分子化合物の形態であることが好ましい。
[Photoacid generator]
The resist composition contains a photoacid generator which is composed of anions and cations and generates an acid upon exposure to actinic rays or radiation.
The photoacid generator is a compound in which the acid dissociation constant A (pKa(A)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation with a proton is smaller than both the acid dissociation constant B (pKa(B)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing a first cation of a first acid diffusion controller described below with a proton, and the acid dissociation constant C (pKa(C)) of the acidic compound obtained by replacing a second cation of a second acid diffusion controller described below with a proton. In other words, the acid dissociation constant A is smaller than the acid dissociation constant B, and the acid dissociation constant A is smaller than the acid dissociation constant C.
The photoacid generator may be in the form of a low molecular weight compound, or may be incorporated into a part of a polymer (e.g., the above-mentioned specific resin).Furthermore, the form of a low molecular weight compound and the form of being incorporated into a part of a polymer may be used in combination.
When the photoacid generator is in the form of a low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight of the photoacid generator is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1000 or less. There is no particular lower limit, but a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable.
The photoacid generator is preferably in the form of a low molecular weight compound.
 光酸発生剤としては、例えば、「M X」で表される化合物(オニウム塩)が挙げられ、露光により有機酸を発生する化合物であることが好ましい。
 上記有機酸として、例えば、スルホン酸(脂肪族スルホン酸、芳香族スルホン酸、及びカンファースルホン酸等)、カルボン酸(脂肪族カルボン酸、芳香族カルボン酸、及びアラルキルカルボン酸等)、カルボニルスルホニルイミド酸、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド酸、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチド酸が挙げられる。
Examples of photoacid generators include compounds (onium salts) represented by "M + X - ", and are preferably compounds that generate an organic acid upon exposure to light.
Examples of the organic acid include sulfonic acids (aliphatic sulfonic acids, aromatic sulfonic acids, camphorsulfonic acids, etc.), carboxylic acids (aliphatic carboxylic acids, aromatic carboxylic acids, aralkyl carboxylic acids, etc.), carbonylsulfonylimide acids, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide acids, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide acids.
 「M X」で表される化合物において、Mは、カチオンを表す。
 カチオンとしては、有機カチオンが好ましい。
 有機カチオンとしては特に制限されない。有機カチオンの価数は、1又は2価以上であってもよい。
 なかでも、上記有機カチオンとしては、式(ZaI)で表されるカチオン(以下「カチオン(ZaI)」ともいう。)、又は式(ZaII)で表されるカチオン(以下「カチオン(ZaII)」ともいう。)が好ましい。
In the compound represented by "M + X - ", M + represents a cation.
The cation is preferably an organic cation.
The organic cation is not particularly limited, and the valence of the organic cation may be monovalent or divalent or higher.
Among them, the organic cation is preferably a cation represented by formula (ZaI) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaI)") or a cation represented by formula (ZaII) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaII)").
 上記式(ZaI)中、R201、R202、及びR203は、それぞれ独立に、有機基を表す。
 上記有機基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましい。R201~R203のうち2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203の内の2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基)、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-が挙げられる。
In the above formula (ZaI), R 201 , R 202 and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
The number of carbon atoms in the organic group is preferably 1 to 30, and more preferably 1 to 20. Two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. Examples of the group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 include an alkylene group (e.g., a butylene group and a pentylene group) and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -.
 式(ZaI)における有機カチオンの好適な態様としては、後述する、カチオン(ZaI-1)、カチオン(ZaI-2)、カチオン(ZaI-3b)、及びカチオン(ZaI-4b)が挙げられる。 Suitable embodiments of the organic cation in formula (ZaI) include cation (ZaI-1), cation (ZaI-2), cation (ZaI-3b), and cation (ZaI-4b), which will be described later.
 まず、カチオン(ZaI-1)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-1)は、上記式(ZaI)のR201~R203の少なくとも1つがアリール基である、アリールスルホニウムカチオンである。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンは、R201~R203の全てがアリール基でもよいし、R201~R203の一部がアリール基であり、残りがアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基であってもよい。
 R201~R203のうちの1つがアリール基であり、R201~R203のうちの残りの2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203のうちの2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、1つ以上のメチレン基が酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、及び/又はカルボニル基で置換されていてもよいアルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-)が挙げられる。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンとしては、トリアリールスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、アリールジアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、及びアリールジシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオンが挙げられる。
First, the cation (ZaI-1) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-1) is an arylsulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 in the above formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
In the arylsulfonium cation, all of R 201 to R 203 may be aryl groups, or some of R 201 to R 203 may be aryl groups, with the remainder being alkyl groups or cycloalkyl groups.
One of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, which may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group in the ring. Examples of the group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 include alkylene groups in which one or more methylene groups may be substituted with oxygen atoms, sulfur atoms, ester groups, amide groups, and/or carbonyl groups (e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -).
Arylsulfonium cations include triarylsulfonium cations, diarylalkylsulfonium cations, aryldialkylsulfonium cations, diarylcycloalkylsulfonium cations, and aryldicycloalkylsulfonium cations.
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンに含まれるアリール基としては、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。アリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環構造を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環構造としては、ピロール残基、フラン残基、チオフェン残基、インドール残基、ベンゾフラン残基、及びベンゾチオフェン残基が挙げられる。アリールスルホニウムカチオンが2つ以上のアリール基を有する場合に、2つ以上あるアリール基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンが有していてもよいアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基は、炭素数1~15の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~15の分岐鎖状アルキル基、及び炭素数3~15のシクロアルキル基が挙げられ、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、又はシクロヘキシル基が好ましい。
The aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, more preferably a phenyl group.The aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure with an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.The heterocyclic structure may include a pyrrole residue, a furan residue, a thiophene residue, an indole residue, a benzofuran residue, and a benzothiophene residue.When the arylsulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
Examples of the alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation may have include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an n-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, or a cyclohexyl group is preferable.
 R201~R203のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、アルキル基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば、炭素数6~14)、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキルアルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素及びヨウ素)、水酸基、カルボキシ基、エステル基、スルフィニル基、スルホニル基、アルキルチオ基、及びフェニルチオ基が挙げられる。
 上記置換基は更に置換基を有していてもよく、上記アルキル基が置換基としてハロゲン原子を有して、トリフルオロメチル基等のハロゲン化アルキル基を構成していることも好ましい。
 上記置換基は、酸分解性基であってもよい。酸分解性基の定義及び好適態様は、上述の通りである。
Examples of the substituent that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (e.g., having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylalkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a halogen atom (e.g., fluorine and iodine), a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an ester group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an alkylthio group, and a phenylthio group.
The above-mentioned substituent may further have a substituent, and it is also preferable that the above-mentioned alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent to form a halogenated alkyl group such as a trifluoromethyl group.
The above-mentioned substituent may be an acid-decomposable group. The definition and preferred embodiments of the acid-decomposable group are as described above.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-2)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-2)は、式(ZaI)におけるR201~R203が、それぞれ独立に、芳香環を有さない有機基を表すカチオンである。芳香環とは、ヘテロ原子を含む芳香族環も包含する。
 上記芳香環を有さない有機基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましい。
 R201~R203としては、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基が好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、又はアルコキシカルボニルメチル基がより好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基が更に好ましい。
Next, the cation (ZaI-2) will be described.
Cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in formula (ZaI) each independently represent an organic group not having an aromatic ring. The aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a heteroatom.
The organic group not having an aromatic ring preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, more preferably a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, or an alkoxycarbonylmethyl group, and still more preferably a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group.
 R201~R203のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基は、例えば、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基及び炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、及びペンチル基)、並びに、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及びノルボルニル基)が挙げられる。
 R201~R203は、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~5)、水酸基、シアノ基、又はニトロ基によって更に置換されていてもよい。
 R201~R203の置換基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基の任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。
Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include linear alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and branched alkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, and pentyl groups), as well as cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and norbornyl groups).
R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (eg, having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
It is also preferred that the substituents of R 201 to R 203 each independently form an acid-decomposable group through any combination of the substituents.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-3b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-3b)は、下記式(ZaI-3b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-3b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-3b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(ZaI-3b)中、R1c~R5cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、シクロアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、ニトロ基、アルキルチオ基、又はアリールチオ基を表す。
 R6c及びR7cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(例えば、t-ブチル基等)、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はアリール基を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基を表す。
 R1c~R7c、並びに、R及びRの置換基は、酸分解性基であってもよい。
In formula (ZaI-3b), R 1c to R 5c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, a cycloalkylcarbonyloxy group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
R 6c and R 7c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (eg, a t-butyl group), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
The substituents of R 1c to R 7c and R x and R y may be acid-decomposable groups.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、及びRとRは、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよく、この環は、それぞれ独立に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又は炭素-炭素二重結合を有していてもよい。また、R5cとR6c、及びR5cとRは、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよく、この環は、それぞれ独立に炭素-炭素二重結合を有しているのも好ましい。また、R6cとR7cは、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよい。
 なお、形成される環が酸素原子等を有するとは、例えば、結合できる二つの基(例えばRとR)が互いに結合してアルキレン基を形成し、このようなアルキレン基中のメチレン基が酸素原子等で置換されている形態である。
 また、上記環としては、芳香族又は非芳香族の炭化水素環、芳香族又は非芳香族の複素環、及びこれらの環が2つ以上組み合わされてなる多環の縮合環が挙げられる。環としては、3~10員環が好ましく、4~8員環がより好ましく、5又は6員環が更に好ましい。
Any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , and R x and R y may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and each of these rings may independently have an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbon-carbon double bond. R 5c and R 6c , and R 5c and R x may be bonded to each other to form a ring, and each of these rings may independently have a carbon-carbon double bond. R 6c and R 7c may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
In addition, the formed ring having an oxygen atom or the like means, for example, that two bondable groups (e.g., Rx and Ry ) are bonded to each other to form an alkylene group, and a methylene group in such an alkylene group is substituted with an oxygen atom or the like.
Examples of the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocyclic ring, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings. The ring is preferably a 3- to 10-membered ring, more preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and even more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R6cとR7c、及びRとRが結合して形成する基としては、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-等が挙げられる。
 R5cとR6c、及びR5cとRが結合して形成する基としては、単結合又はアルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基としては、メチレン基、及びエチレン基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include a butylene group, a pentylene group, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - .
The groups formed by combining R5c and R6c , and R5c and Rx are preferably a single bond or an alkylene group. Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-4b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-4b)は、下記式(ZaI-4b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-4b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-4b).
 式(ZaI-4b)中、lは0~2の整数を表し、rは0~8の整数を表す。
 R13は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子等)、水酸基、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を含む基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。
 R14は、水酸基、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子等)、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、シクロアルキルスルホニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を含む基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。R14が複数存在する場合、複数存在するR14は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 R15は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はナフチル基を表す。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成するとき、環構造内に、酸素原子、又は窒素原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでもよい。
 一態様において、2つのR15がアルキレン基であり、互いに結合して環構造を形成することが好ましい。
 なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、及び上記ナフチル基、並びに、2つのR15が互いに結合して形成する環は置換基を有してもよい。
In formula (ZaI-4b), l represents an integer of 0 to 2; r represents an integer of 0 to 8.
R 13 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom or an iodine atom), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a carboxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a group containing a cycloalkyl group (which may be a cycloalkyl group itself or a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). These groups may have a substituent.
R 14 represents a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom, etc.), an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group containing a cycloalkyl group (which may be a cycloalkyl group itself or a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). These groups may have a substituent. When there are multiple R 14s , the multiple R 14s may be the same or different.
Each R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. Two R 15 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When two R 15 are bonded to each other to form a ring, the ring structure may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
In one embodiment, it is preferred that two R 15 are alkylene groups and are bonded to each other to form a ring structure.
The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the naphthyl group, and the ring formed by bonding two R 15 together may have a substituent.
 式(ZaI-4b)において、R13、R14、及びR15のアルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。アルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-ブチル基、又はt-ブチル基が好ましい。
 R13~R15で表される基は、酸分解性基であってもよい。
In formula (ZaI-4b), the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group or a t-butyl group.
The groups represented by R 13 to R 15 may be acid-decomposable groups.
 次に、式(ZaII)について説明する。
 式(ZaII)中、R204及びR205は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基を表す。
 R204及びR205のアリール基としては、フェニル基、又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。R204及びR205のアリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環を有するアリール基の骨格としては、例えば、ピロール、フラン、チオフェン、インドール、ベンゾフラン、及びベンゾチオフェンが挙げられる。
 R204及びR205のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、又はペンチル基)、又は炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えばシクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、又はノルボルニル基)が好ましい。
Next, formula (ZaII) will be described.
In formula (ZaII), R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, more preferably a phenyl group. The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle with an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
The alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 are preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, or a pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (e.g., a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group).
 R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい。R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば、炭素数6~15)、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及びフェニルチオ基が挙げられる。R204及びR205の置換基は、酸分解性基であってもよい。 The aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent. Examples of the substituent that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (e.g., having 6 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (e.g., having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and a phenylthio group. The substituent of R 204 and R 205 may be an acid-decomposable group.
 以下に有機カチオンの具体例を示すが、本発明は、これに限定されない。 Specific examples of organic cations are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 「M X」中、Xは、プロトンと結合してなる酸性化合物Aの酸解離定数A(pKa(A))が、後述する酸拡散制御剤のカチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数よりも小さい有機アニオンである。
 上記酸解離定数Aは、上記要件を満たせば特に制限されないが、-10.00~4.00が好ましく、-8.00~2.00がより好ましく、-8.00~0.00が更に好ましい。
In "M + X - ", X - is an organic anion having an acid dissociation constant A (pKa(A)) of an acidic compound A bonded to a proton that is smaller than the acid dissociation constant of an acidic compound obtained by replacing a cation of an acid diffusion controller described later with a proton.
The acid dissociation constant A is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above requirements, but is preferably −10.00 to 4.00, more preferably −8.00 to 2.00, and even more preferably −8.00 to 0.00.
 アニオンとしては、有機アニオンが好ましい。
 有機アニオンとしては、特に制限されず、1又は2価以上の有機アニオンが挙げられる。
 有機アニオンとしては、求核反応を起こす能力が著しく低いアニオンが好ましく、非求核性アニオンがより好ましい。
The anion is preferably an organic anion.
The organic anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include monovalent or divalent or higher organic anions.
As the organic anion, anions having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction are preferred, and non-nucleophilic anions are more preferred.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、スルホン酸アニオン(脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、及びカンファースルホン酸アニオン等)、カルボン酸アニオン(脂肪族カルボン酸アニオン、芳香族カルボン酸アニオン、及びアラルキルカルボン酸アニオン等)、スルホニルイミドアニオン、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが挙げられる。 Examples of non-nucleophilic anions include sulfonate anions (aliphatic sulfonate anions, aromatic sulfonate anions, camphorsulfonate anions, etc.), carboxylate anions (aliphatic carboxylate anions, aromatic carboxylate anions, aralkyl carboxylate anions, etc.), sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions.
 脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン及び脂肪族カルボン酸アニオンにおける脂肪族部位は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基のいずれであってもよく、炭素数1~30の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は炭素数3~30のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、例えば、フルオロアルキル基(フッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。パーフルオロアルキル基であってもよい)であってもよい。
The aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonate anion and the aliphatic carboxylate anion may be any of a linear or branched alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group, and is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group may be, for example, a fluoroalkyl group (which may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom, or may be a perfluoroalkyl group).
 芳香族スルホン酸アニオン及び芳香族カルボン酸アニオンにおけるアリール基としては、炭素数6~14のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、トリル基、及びナフチル基が挙げられる。 The aryl group in the aromatic sulfonate anion and aromatic carboxylate anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
 上記で挙げたアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては特に制限されないが、例えば、ニトロ基、フッ素原子及び塩素原子等のハロゲン原子、カルボキシ基、水酸基、アミノ基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキル基(炭素数1~10が好ましい)、シクロアルキル基(炭素数3~15が好ましい)、アリール基(炭素数6~14が好ましい)、アルコキシカルボニル基(炭素数2~7が好ましい)、アシル基(炭素数2~12が好ましい)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(炭素数2~7が好ましい)、アルキルチオ基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキルスルホニル基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキルイミノスルホニル基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、及びアリールオキシスルホニル基(炭素数6~20が好ましい)が挙げられる。 The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group listed above may have a substituent. The substituent is not particularly limited, but examples include a nitro group, a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, a carboxy group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 14 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 7 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkyliminosulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), and an aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms).
 アラルキルカルボン酸アニオンにおけるアラルキル基としては、炭素数7~14のアラルキル基が好ましい。
 炭素数7~14のアラルキル基としては、例えば、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、ナフチルメチル基、ナフチルエチル基、及びナフチルブチル基が挙げられる。
The aralkyl group in the aralkyl carboxylate anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group, and a naphthylbutyl group.
 スルホニルイミドアニオンとしては、例えば、サッカリンアニオンが挙げられる。 An example of a sulfonylimide anion is the saccharin anion.
 ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンにおけるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。これらのアルキル基の置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アルキルオキシスルホニル基、アリールオキシスルホニル基、及びシクロアルキルアリールオキシスルホニル基が挙げられ、フッ素原子又はフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。
 また、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオンにおけるアルキル基は、互いに結合して環構造を形成してもよい。これにより、酸強度が増加する。
The alkyl group in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion and the tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Substituents for these alkyl groups include a halogen atom, an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkyloxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, and a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group, and a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
In addition, the alkyl groups in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure, which increases the acid strength.
 その他の非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、フッ素化燐(例えば、PF )、フッ素化ホウ素(例えば、BF )、及びフッ素化アンチモン(例えば、SbF )が挙げられる。 Other non-nucleophilic anions include, for example, phosphorus fluorides (eg, PF 6 ), boron fluorides (eg, BF 4 ), and antimony fluorides (eg, SbF 6 ).
 非求核性アニオンとしては、スルホン酸の少なくともα位がフッ素原子で置換された脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、フッ素原子若しくはフッ素原子を有する基で置換された芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、アルキル基がフッ素原子で置換されたビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、又はアルキル基がフッ素原子で置換されたトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが好ましい。なかでも、パーフルオロ脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン(炭素数4~8が好ましい)、又はフッ素原子を有するベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンがより好ましく、ノナフルオロブタンスルホン酸アニオン、パーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸アニオン、ペンタフルオロベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、又は3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンが更に好ましい。 Preferred non-nucleophilic anions are aliphatic sulfonate anions in which at least the α-position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, aromatic sulfonate anions substituted with a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions in which an alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, or tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions in which an alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom. Among these, perfluoroaliphatic sulfonate anions (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms) or benzenesulfonate anions having fluorine atoms are more preferable, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate anions, perfluorooctanesulfonate anions, pentafluorobenzenesulfonate anions, or 3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzenesulfonate anions are even more preferable.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(AN2)で表されるアニオンが好ましい。 As a non-nucleophilic anion, an anion represented by the following formula (AN2) is preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(AN2)中、oは、1~3の整数を表す。pは、0~10の整数を表す。qは、0~10の整数を表す。 In formula (AN2), o represents an integer from 1 to 3. p represents an integer from 0 to 10. q represents an integer from 0 to 10.
 Xfは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基、又はフッ素原子を有さない有機基を表す。上記アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。上記少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基としては、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。
 複数存在するXfは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Xfは、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、フッ素原子又はCFであることがより好ましい。なかでも、双方のXfがフッ素原子であることが好ましい。
Each Xf independently represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, or an organic group having no fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
A plurality of Xf's may be the same or different.
Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3. Of these, it is preferable that both Xf are fluorine atoms.
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、アルキル基、又は少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基を表す。R及びRが複数存在する場合、R及びRは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 上記アルキル基は、炭素数1~4が好ましい。上記アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。
 R及びRとしては、水素原子が好ましい。
R4 and R5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom. When a plurality of R4s and R5s are present, R4s and R5s may be the same or different.
The alkyl group preferably has a carbon number of 1 to 4. The alkyl group may have a substituent.
R4 and R5 are preferably a hydrogen atom.
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 Lが複数存在する場合、Lは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、-CONH-、及び炭素数1~17の炭化水素基(例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又はアルケニレン基)、並びにこれらの複数を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 なお、上記炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、カルボキシ基、炭素数1~7のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~5のアシル基、炭素数1~5のアルキルオキシカルボニル基、及び炭素数6~8のアリール基が挙げられる。また、上記シクロアルキレン基を構成するメチレン基のうち1以上が、-O-、-S-、又は-CO-で置換されていてもよい。
 なかでも、2価の連結基としては、-O-、-CO-、アルキレン基、又はシクロアルキレン基が好ましい。
L represents a divalent linking group.
When a plurality of L's are present, each L may be the same or different.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, -CONH-, and hydrocarbon groups having 1 to 17 carbon atoms (e.g., alkylene groups, cycloalkylene groups, or alkenylene groups), as well as groups combining two or more of these.
The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a carboxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an acyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 8 carbon atoms. In addition, one or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkylene group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, or -CO-.
Among these, the divalent linking group is preferably --O--, --CO--, an alkylene group, or a cycloalkylene group.
 (L)としては、例えば、式(AN2-1)で表される基も好ましい。
 *-(Rt-Q-((Rt-Q-*   式(AN2-1)
 式(AN2-1)中、*は、式(AN2)におけるC(R)(R)との結合位置を表す。*は、式(AN2)におけるWとの結合位置を表す。
 x、y、及びzはそれぞれ独立に、0~10の整数を表し、0~3が好ましく、1又は2がより好ましい。
 Rt及びRtは、それぞれ独立に、2価の炭化水素基を表す。
 上記炭化水素基としては、アルキレン基(好ましくは、炭素数1~7)、シクロアルキレン基(好ましくは、炭素数3~17)、及びアルケニレン基(好ましくは、炭素数2~8)が挙げられる。なお、上記炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよく、上記シクロアルキレン基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよい。シクロアルキレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。
 Qは、-COO-、-CO-、-O-、-O-CO-O-、-S-、-CONH-、-SO-、又は-SO-を表し、-COO-、-CO-、又は-O-が好ましい。
 Qは、yが0の場合、単結合であり、yが1以上の整数である場合、単結合又はQで挙げられる2価の連結基を表す。Qとしては、単結合、-COO-、-CO-、又は-O-が好ましい。
 Rt、Rt、及びQが複数存在する場合、複数存在するRt、Rt、及びQは、それぞれ同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
(L) q is preferably, for example, a group represented by formula (AN2-1).
* a- ( Rt1 ) x - Q1 -(( Rt2 ) y - Q2 ) z- * b formula (AN2-1)
In formula (AN2-1), * a represents the bonding position to C(R 4 )(R 5 ) in formula (AN2), and * b represents the bonding position to W in formula (AN2).
x, y, and z each independently represent an integer of 0 to 10, preferably 0 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
Rt1 and Rt2 each independently represent a divalent hydrocarbon group.
Examples of the hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 7 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably having 3 to 17 carbon atoms), and an alkenylene group (preferably having 2 to 8 carbon atoms). The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent, and a methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -. The cycloalkylene group may be either monocyclic or polycyclic.
Q 1 represents —COO—, —CO—, —O—, —O—CO—O—, —S—, —CONH—, —SO— or —SO 2 —, and is preferably —COO—, —CO— or —O—.
Q2 represents a single bond when y is 0, and represents a single bond or a divalent linking group mentioned for Q1 when y is an integer of 1 or more. Q2 is preferably a single bond, -COO-, -CO- or -O-.
When a plurality of Rt 1 , Rt 2 and Q 2 are present, the plurality of Rt 1 , Rt 2 and Q 2 may be the same or different.
 Wは、環状構造を含む有機基を表す。なかでも、環状の有機基であることが好ましい。
 環状の有機基としては、例えば、脂環基、アリール基、及び複素環基が挙げられる。
 上記脂環基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。単環の脂環基としては、例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及びシクロオクチル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられる。多環の脂環基としては、例えば、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、デカヒドロナフチル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の炭素数7以上の嵩高い構造を有する脂環基が好ましい。
 上記アリール基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。アリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、及びアントリル基が挙げられる。
 上記複素環基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい。なかでも、多環の複素環基である場合、より酸の拡散を抑制できる。複素環基は、芳香族性を有していてもよいし、芳香族性を有していなくてもよい。芳香族性を有している複素環としては、例えば、フラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ジベンゾフラン環、ジベンゾチオフェン環、及びピリジン環が挙げられる。芳香族性を有していない複素環としては、例えば、テトラヒドロピラン環、ラクトン環、スルトン環、及びデカヒドロイソキノリン環が挙げられる。
W represents an organic group containing a cyclic structure, and is preferably a cyclic organic group.
Examples of the cyclic organic group include an alicyclic group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
The alicyclic group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group. Examples of the monocyclic alicyclic group include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group. Examples of the polycyclic alicyclic group include polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, a decahydronaphthyl group, and an adamantyl group.
Among these, alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group, are preferred.
The aryl group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group, and examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and an anthryl group.
The heterocyclic group may be either a single ring or a polycyclic ring. In particular, when the heterocyclic group is a polycyclic ring, the diffusion of the acid can be more suppressed. The heterocyclic group may have aromaticity or may not have aromaticity. Examples of the heterocyclic ring having aromaticity include a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, and a pyridine ring. Examples of the heterocyclic ring having no aromaticity include a tetrahydropyran ring, a lactone ring, a sultone ring, and a decahydroisoquinoline ring.
 上記環状の有機基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよく、炭素数1~12が好ましい)、シクロアルキル基(単環、多環、及びスピロ環のいずれであってもよく、炭素数3~20が好ましい)、アリール基(炭素数6~14が好ましい)、水酸基、アルコキシ基、エステル基、アミド基、ウレタン基、ウレイド基、チオエーテル基、スルホンアミド基、及びスルホン酸エステル基が挙げられる。なお、環状の有機基を構成する炭素(環形成に寄与する炭素)はカルボニル炭素であってもよい。 The cyclic organic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an alkyl group (which may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (which may be either monocyclic, polycyclic, or spirocyclic, and preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms), an aryl group (which preferably has 6 to 14 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an ester group, an amide group, a urethane group, a ureido group, a thioether group, a sulfonamide group, and a sulfonate ester group. The carbon that constitutes the cyclic organic group (the carbon that contributes to the ring formation) may be a carbonyl carbon.
 式(AN2)で表されるアニオンとしては、SO -CF-CH-OCO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-CHF-CH-OCO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-COO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-CF-CH-CH-(L)-W、又はSO -CF-CH(CF)-OCO-(L)q’-Wが好ましい。ここで、L、q及びWは、式(AN2)と同様である。q’は、0~10の整数を表す。 The anion represented by formula (AN2) is preferably SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CHF-CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -COO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CF 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 -(L) q -W, or SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH(CF 3 )-OCO-(L) q' -W. Here, L, q and W are the same as those in formula (AN2). q' represents an integer of 0 to 10.
 また、非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(d1-1)~(d1-4)で表されるアニオンも挙げられる。 Furthermore, examples of non-nucleophilic anions include anions represented by the following formulas (d1-1) to (d1-4).
 式(d1-1)中、R51は置換基(例えば、水酸基)を有していてもよい炭化水素基(例えば、フェニル基等のアリール基)を表す。 In formula (d1-1), R 51 represents a hydrocarbon group (for example, an aryl group such as a phenyl group) which may have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group).
 式(d1-2)中、Z2cは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~30の炭化水素基(ただし、Sに隣接する炭素原子にはフッ素原子が置換されない)を表す。
 Z2cにおける上記炭化水素基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよく、環状構造を有していてもよい。また、上記炭化水素基における炭素原子(好ましくは、上記炭化水素基が環状構造を有する場合における、環員原子である炭素原子)は、カルボニル炭素であってもよい。上記炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよいノルボルニル基を有する基が挙げられる。上記ノルボルニル基を形成する炭素原子は、カルボニル炭素であってもよい。
 式(d1-2)中の「Z2c-SO 」は、上述の式(AN2)で表されるアニオンとは異なることが好ましい。例えば、Z2cは、アリール基以外が好ましい。例えば、Z2cにおける、-SO に対してα位及びβ位の原子は、置換基としてフッ素原子を有する炭素原子以外の原子が好ましい。例えば、Z2cは、-SO に対してα位の原子及び/又はβ位の原子は環状基中の環員原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (d1-2), Z 2c represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (with the proviso that the carbon atom adjacent to S is not substituted with a fluorine atom).
The hydrocarbon group in Z 2c may be either linear or branched, and may have a cyclic structure. In addition, the carbon atom in the hydrocarbon group (preferably, when the hydrocarbon group has a cyclic structure, the carbon atom that is a ring atom) may be a carbonyl carbon. Examples of the hydrocarbon group include a group having a norbornyl group that may have a substituent. The carbon atom forming the norbornyl group may be a carbonyl carbon.
It is preferable that "Z 2c -SO 3 - " in formula (d1-2) is different from the anion represented by formula (AN2) above. For example, Z 2c is preferably other than an aryl group. For example, in Z 2c , the atoms at the α-position and the β-position relative to -SO 3 - are preferably atoms other than a carbon atom having a fluorine atom as a substituent. For example, it is preferable that the atom at the α-position and/or the atom at the β-position relative to -SO 3 - in Z 2c is a ring member atom in a cyclic group.
 式(d1-3)中、R52は有機基(好ましくはフッ素原子を有する炭化水素基)を表し、Yは直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキレン基、アリーレン基、又はカルボニル基を表し、Rfは炭化水素基を表す。 In formula (d1-3), R 52 represents an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom), Y 3 represents a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group, arylene group, or carbonyl group, and Rf represents a hydrocarbon group.
 式(d1-4)中、R53及びR54は、それぞれ独立に、有機基(好ましくはフッ素原子を有する炭化水素基)を表す。R53及びR54は互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 In formula (d1-4), R 53 and R 54 each independently represent an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom), and R 53 and R 54 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 有機アニオンは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 The organic anion may be used alone or in combination of two or more types.
 光酸発生剤の含有量は、形成されるパターンの断面形状がより矩形化する点で、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、5~30質量%が好ましく、5~25質量%がより好ましく、10~20質量%が更に好ましい。
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
The content of the photoacid generator is preferably from 5 to 30 mass %, more preferably from 5 to 25 mass %, and even more preferably from 10 to 20 mass %, relative to the total solids content of the resist composition, from the viewpoint that the cross-sectional shape of the formed pattern becomes more rectangular.
The photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
〔酸拡散制御剤〕
 本発明のレジスト組成物は、第1酸拡散制御剤と第2酸拡散制御剤との少なくとも2種の酸拡散制御剤を含む。
 酸拡散制御剤は、アニオンとカチオンとからなり、上記酸拡散制御剤のカチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数(pKa(Q))が、上述の光酸発生剤のカチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物AのpKa(A)よりも大きい化合物である。換言すると、上記酸拡散制御剤は、上記光酸発生剤から生じる酸に対して弱酸である酸を発生するオニウム塩である。
 このような酸拡散制御剤と光酸発生剤から発生した酸とが衝突すると、光酸発生剤から発生した酸と、酸拡散制御剤のカチオンとが交換し、より触媒能の低い弱酸が放出される。この反応により、見かけ上、酸拡散制御剤は、光酸発生剤等から発生する酸をトラップし、未露光部における酸と上記樹脂との反応を抑制するクエンチャーとして作用する。
[Acid Diffusion Controller]
The resist composition of the present invention contains at least two types of acid diffusion controllers: a first acid diffusion controller and a second acid diffusion controller.
The acid diffusion controller is a compound consisting of an anion and a cation, and has an acid dissociation constant (pKa(Q)) greater than the pKa(A) of acidic compound A obtained by replacing the cation of the photoacid generator with a proton. In other words, the acid diffusion controller is an onium salt that generates an acid that is weaker than the acid generated by the photoacid generator.
When such an acid diffusion controller collides with the acid generated from the photoacid generator, the acid generated from the photoacid generator is exchanged with the cation of the acid diffusion controller, and a weak acid with a lower catalytic activity is released. Due to this reaction, the acid diffusion controller apparently traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator, etc., and acts as a quencher that suppresses the reaction of the acid in the unexposed area with the resin.
 上記酸拡散制御剤に含まれるアニオンは、pKa(Q)が、上述のpKa(A)よりも大きいアニオンである。
 アニオンとしては、有機アニオンが好ましい。
 有機アニオンとしては、特に制限されず、1又は2価以上の有機アニオンが挙げられる。
 有機アニオンとしては、求核反応を起こす能力が著しく低いアニオンが好ましく、非求核性アニオンがより好ましい。
The anion contained in the acid diffusion controller has a pKa (Q) greater than the above-mentioned pKa (A).
The anion is preferably an organic anion.
The organic anion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include monovalent or divalent or higher organic anions.
As the organic anion, anions having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction are preferred, and non-nucleophilic anions are more preferred.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、スルホン酸アニオン、カルボン酸アニオン、スルホニルイミドアニオン、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが挙げられ、pKa(A)とpKa(Q)との関係が適切に調整できる点で、カルボン酸アニオン、スルホニルイミドアニオン、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、又はトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが好ましく、カルボン酸アニオンがより好ましい。 Examples of non-nucleophilic anions include sulfonate anions, carboxylate anions, sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions. In terms of the ability to appropriately adjust the relationship between pKa(A) and pKa(Q), carboxylate anions, sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions are preferred, with carboxylate anions being more preferred.
 上記酸拡散制御剤に含まれるカチオンとしては、有機カチオンが好ましい。
 有機カチオンとしては、スルホニウムカチオン、アンモニウムカチオン、及びヨードニウムカチオンが挙げられる。上記有機カチオンとしては、例えば、上記光酸発生剤に含まれ得る有機カチオンが使用できる。
 なかでも、カチオン(ZaI)が好ましく、カチオン(ZaI-1)又はカチオン(ZaI-3b)がより好ましく、カチオン(ZaI-1)が更に好ましい。
The cation contained in the acid diffusion controller is preferably an organic cation.
Examples of the organic cation include a sulfonium cation, an ammonium cation, and an iodonium cation. As the organic cation, for example, an organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used.
Of these, cation (ZaI) is preferred, cation (ZaI-1) or cation (ZaI-3b) is more preferred, and cation (ZaI-1) is even more preferred.
 酸拡散制御剤は、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、化合物の分子内に、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する化合物であることも好ましい。すなわち、第1酸拡散制御剤及び第2酸拡散制御剤から選択される少なくとも1つの化合物の分子内に、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有することが好ましい。 The acid diffusion controller is preferably a compound having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. In other words, it is preferable that at least one compound selected from the first acid diffusion controller and the second acid diffusion controller has a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule.
 以下、第1酸拡散制御剤及び第2酸拡散制御剤について詳述する。 The first acid diffusion control agent and the second acid diffusion control agent are described in detail below.
<第1酸拡散制御剤>
 第1酸拡散制御剤は、第1アニオンと第1カチオンとからなる酸拡散制御剤である。
<First Acid Diffusion Controller>
The first acid diffusion controller is an acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation.
(第1アニオン)
 第1アニオンは、多環の脂環構造及びアニオン性基を有する有機アニオンである。
(First anion)
The first anion is an organic anion having a polycyclic alicyclic structure and an anionic group.
 上記多環の脂環構造は、少なくとも2つ以上の脂環が縮環してなる構造である。
 多環の脂環構造に含まれる環の数の上限は特に制限されないが、例えば、8以下が好ましく、5以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、2以上であればよく、3以上が好ましい。
 上記多環の脂環構造は、橋かけ構造を有することも好ましい。橋かけ構造を有する多環の脂環構造としては、例えば、アダマンタン構造及びノルボルナン構造が挙げられる。
 多環の脂環構造の環員原子数は、5~36が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、7~15が更に好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造の例を以下に示す。
The polycyclic alicyclic structure is a structure formed by condensing at least two or more alicyclic rings.
The upper limit of the number of rings contained in the polycyclic alicyclic structure is not particularly limited, but is preferably, for example, 8 or less, and more preferably 5 or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but may be 2 or more, and is preferably 3 or more.
The polycyclic alicyclic structure preferably has a bridged structure. Examples of the polycyclic alicyclic structure having a bridged structure include an adamantane structure and a norbornane structure.
The polycyclic alicyclic structure preferably has 5 to 36 ring atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 ring atoms, and even more preferably 7 to 15 ring atoms.
Examples of polycyclic alicyclic structures are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 多環の脂環構造としては、なかでも、アダマンタン構造(式(a1)で表される構造)、ノルボルナン構造(式(a2)で表される構造)、式(a3)で表される構造、又は、式(a4)で表される構造が好ましく、アダマンタン構造又はノルボルナン構造がより好ましく、アダマンタン構造が更に好ましい。 Among the polycyclic alicyclic structures, an adamantane structure (structure represented by formula (a1)), a norbornane structure (structure represented by formula (a2)), a structure represented by formula (a3), or a structure represented by formula (a4) is preferred, an adamantane structure or a norbornane structure is more preferred, and an adamantane structure is even more preferred.
 多環の脂環構造を構成するメチレン基の1つ以上は、-O-、-S-、-SO-、又は-CO-で置換されていてもよく、多環の脂環構造を構成するエチレン基は、ビニレン基で置換されていてもよい。
 例えば、多環の脂環構造が、アダマンタン構造を構成する1つのメチレン基が-CO-に置き換わったアダマンタノン構造(下記式(a1-1)で表される構造)であってもよく、ノルボルナン構造を構成する1つのエチレン基がビニレン基で置き換わったノルボルネン構造(下記式(a2-3)で表される構造)であってもよい。
 なお、同一の基が連続しない限り、隣接する2つ以上のメチレン基がそれぞれ-O-、-S-、-SO-、又は-CO-に置き換わっていてもよい。例えば、隣接する2つのメチレン基がそれぞれ-O-及び-CO-に置き換わって、ラクトン環を形成してもよい。
 多環の脂環構造を構成する少なくとも1つ以上のメチレン基が-O-、-S-、-SO-、若しくは-CO-に置き換わっている、又は、多環の脂環構造を構成する少なくとも1つ以上のエチレン基がビニレン基で置換されている、多環の脂環構造の例を以下に示す。
One or more methylene groups constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with —O—, —S—, —SO 2 —, or —CO—, and an ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with a vinylene group.
For example, the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be an adamantanone structure (structure represented by formula (a1-1) below) in which one methylene group constituting the adamantane structure is replaced with —CO—, or a norbornane structure (structure represented by formula (a2-3) below) in which one ethylene group constituting the norbornane structure is replaced with a vinylene group.
As long as the same groups are not consecutive, two or more adjacent methylene groups may be replaced with -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -CO-, respectively. For example, two adjacent methylene groups may be replaced with -O- and -CO-, respectively, to form a lactone ring.
Examples of polycyclic alicyclic structures in which at least one methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure is replaced with -O-, -S-, -SO 2 -, or -CO-, or at least one ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure is replaced with a vinylene group, are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 なかでも、多環の脂環構造としては、アダマンタン構造、アダマンタノン構造、ノルボルナン構造、ノルボルネン構造、式(a3-1)で表される構造、又は式(a15-1)で表される構造が好ましく、アダマンタン構造又はアダマンタノン構造がより好ましい。
 第1アニオンが有する多環の脂環構造の数は特に制限されないが、1~2が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
Among these, the polycyclic alicyclic structure is preferably an adamantane structure, an adamantanone structure, a norbornane structure, a norbornene structure, a structure represented by formula (a3-1), or a structure represented by formula (a15-1), and more preferably an adamantane structure or an adamantanone structure.
The number of polycyclic alicyclic structures in the first anion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 2, and more preferably 1.
 多環の脂環構造は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数4~8)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルキルオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~12)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)、アラルキル基(好ましくは炭素数7~13)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、及びアシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)が挙げられる。
 上記アルコキシ基、上記アルキルオキシカルボニル基、上記アルキルチオ基、上記アシル基、及び上記アシルオキシ基には、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基が含まれ、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記置換基は、可能な場合は更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基又は上記シクロアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい。
 上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造が置換基を有する場合、上記置換基の数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。2つの置換基同士が結合して形成する環としては、例えば、シクロアルカン、環状アセタール、及び環状チオアセタールが挙げられる。
 なお、2つの置換基同士が互いに結合して環を形成する場合、2つの置換基は脂環構造中の同一の炭素原子に結合していてもよいし、異なる炭素原子に結合していてもよい。
The polycyclic alicyclic structure may have a substituent.
Examples of the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
The alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
The above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible. For example, the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
As the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom is preferable, and a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable.
When the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a substituent, the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 4.
When the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
When two substituents are bonded to each other to form a ring, the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
 上記アニオン性基としては、-CO 、-SO 、-SO-N-、及び、-SO-N-SO-で表される基が挙げられ、-CO で表される基が好ましい。
 上記アニオン性基と上記多環の脂環構造は直接結合していてもよく、連結基を介して結合していてもよいが、直接結合していることが好ましい。
Examples of the anionic group include groups represented by -CO 2 - , -SO 3 - , -SO 2 -N - and -SO 2 -N - -SO 2 -, with the group represented by -CO 2 - being preferred.
The anionic group and the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be bonded directly or via a linking group, but are preferably bonded directly.
 親水性が適切に調整できる点から、第1アニオンは、疎水性の置換基(例えば、アルキル基及びフッ素原子)を有しないことも好ましい。
 親水性が適切に調整できる点から、第1アニオンは、水酸基、カルボニル基、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、及びエステル結合から選択される部位を少なくとも1つ以上有することも好ましく、水酸基、カルボニル基、エーテル結合、及びエステル結合から選択される部位を少なくとも1つ以上有することがより好ましい。
In terms of enabling appropriate adjustment of hydrophilicity, it is also preferable that the first anion does not have a hydrophobic substituent (for example, an alkyl group or a fluorine atom).
In terms of enabling appropriate adjustment of hydrophilicity, it is also preferable for the first anion to have at least one site selected from a hydroxyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, a thioether bond, and an ester bond, and it is more preferable for the first anion to have at least one site selected from a hydroxyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, and an ester bond.
 第1アニオンは、下記式(QA1)で表されるアニオンが好ましい。 The first anion is preferably an anion represented by the following formula (QA1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(QA1)中、Wは、置換基を有していてもよい多環の脂環構造を表す。多環の脂環構造の定義及び好適態様は、上述の通りである。
 上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数4~8)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルキルオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~12)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)、アラルキル基(好ましくは炭素数7~13)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、及びアシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)が挙げられる。
 上記アルコキシ基、上記アルキルオキシカルボニル基、上記アルキルチオ基、上記アシル基、及び上記アシルオキシ基には、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基が含まれ、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記置換基は、可能な場合は更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基又は上記シクロアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい。
 上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基がより好ましく、水酸基が更に好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造が置換基を有する場合、置換基の数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。2つの置換基同士が結合して形成する環としては、例えば、シクロアルカン、環状アセタール、及び環状チオアセタールが挙げられる。
 なお、2つの置換基同士が互いに結合して環を形成する場合、2つの置換基は脂環構造中の同一の炭素原子に結合していてもよいし、異なる炭素原子に結合していてもよい。
 上記2つの置換基同士が互いに結合して形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基が挙げられ、水酸基が好ましい。
In formula (QA1), W 1 represents a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent. The definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
Examples of the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
The alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
The above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible. For example, the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
As the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom is preferable, a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable, and a hydroxyl group is still more preferable.
When the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a substituent, the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
When the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
When two substituents are bonded to each other to form a ring, the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
The ring formed by bonding the two substituents together may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group is preferred.
 LQ1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、2価の炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、及びこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。ただし、X と隣接する基は、2価の炭化水素基である。
 上記2価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びアリーレン基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキレン基は直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよく、単環が好ましい。上記シクロアルキレン基の炭素数は、3~12が好ましく、4~8がより好ましく、4~6が更に好ましい。シクロアルキレン基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置き換わっていてもよい。
 上記アルケニレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルケニレン基の炭素数は2~12が好ましく、2~6がより好ましい。
 上記アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~12が好ましく、6~10が好ましい。
 上記2価の炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基として例示した基が挙げられ、水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましく、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子がより好ましい。
 なかでも、2価の連結基としては、*-O-CO-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*、*-CO-O-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*、*-O-CO-シクロアルキレン基-*、*-CO-O-シクロアルキレン基-*、*-O-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*-CO-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*、又は*-O-シクロアルキレン基-*が好ましい。*はWとの結合位置を表し、*はX との結合位置を表す。
 LQ1としては、単結合、*-O-CO-アルキレン基-*、*-CO-O-アルキレン基-*、又は*-O-アルキレン基-*が好ましい。
L Q1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include divalent hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and combinations of these, provided that the group adjacent to X Q - is a divalent hydrocarbon group.
Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
The alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring. The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, more preferably 4 to 8, and even more preferably 4 to 6. A methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
The alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
The divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable.
Among them, the divalent linking group is preferably * W -O-CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W -CO-O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W -O-CO-cycloalkylene group-* X , * W -CO-O-cycloalkylene group-* X , * W -O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, W -CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, or * W -O-cycloalkylene group-* X . * W represents the bonding position with W1 , and * X represents the bonding position with XQ- .
L Q1 is preferably a single bond, * W -O-CO-alkylene group-* X , * W -CO-O-alkylene group-* X or * W -O-alkylene group-* X .
 X は、アニオン性基を表す。アニオン性基としては、例えば、-CO 及び-SO が挙げられ、-CO が好ましい。 X Q - represents an anionic group. Examples of the anionic group include -CO 2 - and -SO 3 - , with -CO 2 - being preferred.
 式(QA1)で表される第1アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。なお、体積Vの測定方法は後述する。 Examples of the structure of the first anion represented by formula (QA1), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below. The method for measuring the volume V will be described later.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 式(QA1)で表されるアニオンは、式(QA1-1)で表されるアニオンであってもよい。 The anion represented by formula (QA1) may be an anion represented by formula (QA1-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 式(QA1-1)中、LQ1及びX は、式(QA1)中のLQ1及びX と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。 In formula (QA1-1), L Q1 and X Q - have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as L Q1 and X Q - in formula (QA1).
 Wは、置換基を有していてもよい多環の脂環構造である。多環の脂環構造の定義及び好適態様は、上述の通りである。
 Wで表される多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数4~8)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルキルオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~12)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)、アラルキル基(好ましくは炭素数7~13)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、及びアシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)が挙げられる。
 上記アルコキシ基、上記アルキルオキシカルボニル基、上記アルキルチオ基、上記アシル基、及び上記アシルオキシ基には、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基が含まれ、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状、及び、分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記置換基は、可能な場合は更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基又は上記シクロアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい。
 上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、又はヨウ素原子がより好ましい。
W2 is a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent. The definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
Examples of the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure represented by W2 may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
The alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
The above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible. For example, the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
As the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms that may have a halogen atom is preferable, and a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, or an iodine atom is more preferable.
 Y及びYは、それぞれ独立に、メチレン基又はヘテロ原子を表し、メチレン基、硫黄原子、又は酸素原子が好ましく、酸素原子がより好ましい。なかでも、Y及びYは同じ原子であることが好ましく、Y及びYが酸素原子であることがより好ましい。 Y1 and Y2 each independently represent a methylene group or a heteroatom, preferably a methylene group, a sulfur atom, or an oxygen atom, more preferably an oxygen atom. In particular, Y1 and Y2 are preferably the same atom, more preferably Y1 and Y2 are an oxygen atom.
 RQ1は、2価の連結基である。
 上記2価の連結基としては、2価の炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、及びこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 上記2価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びアリーレン基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキレン基は直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよく、単環が好ましい。上記シクロアルキレン基の炭素数は、3~12が好ましく、4~8がより好ましい。シクロアルキレン基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置き換わっていてもよい。
 上記アルケニレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルケニレン基の炭素数は、2~12が好ましく、2~6がより好ましい。
 上記アリーレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよく、単環が好ましい。上記アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~12が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。
 上記2価の炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基として例示した基が挙げられ、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~6のアルコキシ基、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基、又は炭素数1~3のアルコキシ基がより好ましく、水酸基が更に好ましい。
 上記2価の炭化水素基が置換基を有する場合、置換基の数は特に制限されないが、1~8が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。
 上記2価の連結基としては、ハロゲン原子若しくは水酸基を有していてもよいアルキレン基、又は、ハロゲン原子若しくは水酸基を有していてもよいシクロアルキレン基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましい。
R Q1 is a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent hydrocarbon group, --O--, --CO--, --S--, --SO 2 --, and combinations of these.
Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
The alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring. The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, and more preferably 4 to 8. A methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
The alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The arylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic group, and is preferably a monocyclic group. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
The divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, or an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
When the divalent hydrocarbon group has a substituent, the number of the substituents is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 8, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
The divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group which may have a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, or a cycloalkylene group which may have a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkylene group.
 式(QA1-1)で表される第1アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。 Examples of the structure of the first anion represented by formula (QA1-1), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 第1アニオンは、式(QA2)で表されるアニオンであってもよい。 The first anion may be an anion represented by formula (QA2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 式(QA2)中、W、Y、Y、LQ1、及びX は、式(QA1-1)におけるW、Y、Y、LQ1、及びX と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 RQ2は、3価の連結基である。
 上記3価の連結基としては、3価の炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 上記3価の炭化水素基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよい。
 上記3価の炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基として例示した基が挙げられ、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基がより好ましく、水酸基が更に好ましい。
 上記3価の炭化水素基としては、炭素数2~6の分岐鎖状の脂肪族炭化水素基又は炭素数3~8の単環の脂環基が好ましく、炭素数2~6の分岐鎖状の脂肪族炭化水素基がより好ましい。
In formula (QA2), W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- in formula (QA1-1).
R Q2 is a trivalent linking group.
The trivalent linking group includes a trivalent hydrocarbon group.
The methylene group constituting the trivalent hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, -CO-, or -SO 2 -.
The trivalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
The trivalent hydrocarbon group is preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms or a monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
 式(QA2)で表される第1アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。 Examples of the structure of the first anion represented by formula (QA2), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 第1アニオンは、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、式(QA1)で表されるアニオンが好ましく、Wで表される多環の脂環構造以外の環を含まない式(QA1)で表されるアニオンがより好ましい。 The first anion is preferably an anion represented by formula (QA1), in that the effects of the present invention are more excellent, and more preferably an anion represented by formula (QA1) that does not contain any ring other than the polycyclic alicyclic structure represented by W1 .
 第1アニオンとプロトンとが結合してなる酸性化合物BのpKa(B)は、上述のpKa(A)よりも大きければ特に制限されないが、pKa(B)とpKa(A)との差(pKa(B)-pKa(A))は、0.50以上が好ましく、1.00以上がより好ましく、2.00以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、10.00以下が好ましく、8.00以下がより好ましい。
 pKa(B)は、-3.00~8.00が好ましく、-1.00~7.00がより好ましく、0.00~5.00が更に好ましい。
The pKa(B) of the acidic compound B formed by combining the first anion and a proton is not particularly limited as long as it is larger than the above-mentioned pKa(A), but the difference between pKa(B) and pKa(A) (pKa(B)-pKa(A)) is preferably 0.50 or more, more preferably 1.00 or more, and even more preferably 2.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, and it is preferably 10.00 or less, and more preferably 8.00 or less.
The pKa(B) is preferably from −3.00 to 8.00, more preferably from −1.00 to 7.00, and even more preferably from 0.00 to 5.00.
 第1アニオンのClogP値は、-1.50以下であり、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、-2.00以下が好ましく、-2.50以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、-5.00以上が好ましく、-4.00以上がより好ましく、-3.00以上が更に好ましい。
 第1アニオンのClogP値が-1.50超である場合、露光部及び未露光部の境界部における酸のクエンチ能が低下し、本発明の効果が悪化する点で好ましくない。
The ClogP value of the first anion is −1.50 or less, and is preferably −2.00 or less, and more preferably −2.50 or less, in terms of providing better effects of the present invention. There is no particular lower limit, but is preferably −5.00 or more, more preferably −4.00 or more, and even more preferably −3.00 or more, in terms of providing better effects of the present invention.
If the ClogP value of the first anion exceeds −1.50, the ability to quench the acid at the boundary between the exposed and unexposed areas decreases, which is undesirable since it deteriorates the effect of the present invention.
 第1アニオンの体積は、後述する第2アニオンの体積よりも小さければ特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、300Å以下が好ましく、250Å以下がより好ましく、200Å以下が更に好ましく、190Å以下が特に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、100Å以上が好ましく、150Å以上がより好ましい。
 なお、アニオンの体積は、以下の方法にて算出できる。
 Winmostar(QM)(V10.7.5 for 64bit Windows、X-Ability社製ソフトウェア)同梱のMOPAC7を用いてPM3(Parameterized Model number 3)法にてアニオンの構造最適化を行う。得られた最適化構造に対して、Winmostar(X-Ability社製ソフトウェア)を用いて、非特許文献1に記載の方法でVan der waals体積を算出する。
 非特許文献1:分子表面積及び体積計算プログラムの改良,長尾輝夫著,111~120頁,27号,1993年,函館高等専門学校紀要
The volume of the first anion is not particularly limited as long as it is smaller than the volume of the second anion described below, but in terms of better effects of the present invention, it is preferably 300 Å3 or less, more preferably 250 Å3 or less, even more preferably 200 Å3 or less, and particularly preferably 190 Å3 or less. There is no particular lower limit, but it is preferably 100 Å3 or more, and more preferably 150 Å3 or more.
The volume of the anion can be calculated by the following method.
The anion structure is optimized by the PM3 (Parameterized Model number 3) method using MOPAC7 included in Winmostar (QM) (V10.7.5 for 64-bit Windows, software manufactured by X-Ability). The Van der Waals volume of the obtained optimized structure is calculated by the method described in Non-Patent Document 1 using Winmostar (software manufactured by X-Ability).
Non-Patent Document 1: Improvement of molecular surface area and volume calculation program, Teruo Nagao, pp. 111-120, No. 27, 1993, Journal of Hakodate National College of Technology
(第1カチオン)
 第1カチオンは特に制限されず、例えば、上記光酸発生剤に含まれ得る有機カチオンが使用できる。なかでも、スルホニウムカチオン又はヨードニウムカチオンが好ましく、スルホニウムカチオンがより好ましい。
 第1カチオンとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、上述のカチオン(ZaI)が好ましく、カチオン(ZaI-1)がより好ましい。
 なかでも、第1カチオンとしては、トリアリールスルホニウムカチオンが好ましく、トリフェニルスルホニウムカチオンがより好ましい。
 カチオンの親水性が適切に制御できる点で、第1カチオンは、置換基として電子供与性基を有していることが好ましく、置換基として、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、又はアルコキシ基を有していることが好ましい。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第1カチオンは、ヨウ素原子又はフッ素原子を有していることも好ましい。
(First Cation)
The first cation is not particularly limited, and for example, any organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used. Among them, a sulfonium cation or an iodonium cation is preferable, and a sulfonium cation is more preferable.
As the first cation, the above-mentioned cation (ZaI) is preferable, and the above-mentioned cation (ZaI-1) is more preferable, in terms of obtaining a better effect of the present invention.
Among these, the first cation is preferably a triarylsulfonium cation, and more preferably a triphenylsulfonium cation.
In terms of being able to appropriately control the hydrophilicity of the cation, the first cation preferably has an electron-donating group as a substituent, and preferably has an alkyl group which may have a halogen atom or an alkoxy group as a substituent.
In terms of obtaining better effects of the present invention, it is also preferable that the first cation has an iodine atom or a fluorine atom.
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第1カチオンのClogP値は、3.00以上が好ましく、5.00以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、20.00以下が好ましく、15.00以下がより好ましい。 In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the ClogP value of the first cation is preferably 3.00 or more, and more preferably 5.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but it is preferably 20.00 or less, and more preferably 15.00 or less.
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量は、レジスト組成物の溶媒を除いた全固形分に対して、30.0質量%以下が好ましく、20.0質量%以下がより好ましく、15.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、1.0質量%以上がより好ましく、3.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、光酸発生剤の含有量に対する、第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量の質量比は、0.1~3.0が好ましく、0.2~2.0がより好ましく、0.3~1.0が更に好ましい。
In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the content of the first acid diffusion controller is preferably 30.0% by mass or less, more preferably 20.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the resist composition excluding the solvent. Although there is no particular lower limit, it is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, and even more preferably 3.0% by mass or more.
In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the mass ratio of the content of the first acid diffusion controller to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably 0.3 to 1.0.
<第2酸拡散制御剤>
 第2酸拡散制御剤は、第2アニオンと第2カチオンとからなる酸拡散制御剤である。
<Second Acid Diffusion Controller>
The second acid diffusion controller is an acid diffusion controller comprising a second anion and a second cation.
(第2アニオン)
 第2アニオンとしては、アニオン性基を有する有機アニオンが好ましい。
 上記アニオン性基としては、-CO 、-SO 、-SO-N-、及び-SO-N-SO-で表される基が挙げられ、-CO で表される基が好ましい。
(Second Anion)
The second anion is preferably an organic anion having an anionic group.
Examples of the anionic group include groups represented by -CO 2 - , -SO 3 - , -SO 2 -N - and -SO 2 -N - -SO 2 -, with the group represented by -CO 2 - being preferred.
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第2アニオンは、環構造を有することが好ましい。
 上記環構造としては、単環若しくは多環の芳香環構造、及び単環若しくは多環の脂環構造が挙げられ、多環の芳香環構造又は多環の脂環構造が好ましく、多環の脂環構造がより好ましい。
 上記芳香環構造としては、例えば、ベンゼン環構造、ナフタレン構造、及びアントラセン構造が挙げられる。
 上記単環の脂環構造としては、炭素数3~8の単環のシクロアルキル環が挙げられる。
 上記多環の脂環構造としては、第1アニオンが有する多環の脂環構造が挙げられ、好適態様も同じである。
 第2アニオンが有する環構造の数は特に制限されないが、1以上が好ましく、2以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、5以下が好ましく、4以下がより好ましい。
 第2アニオンが2以上の環構造を有する場合、その組み合わせは特に制限されないが、1以上の多環の脂環構造を有することが好ましく、多環の脂環構造及び単環の脂環構造を有することがより好ましい。
In terms of obtaining superior effects of the present invention, the second anion preferably has a ring structure.
Examples of the ring structure include a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic ring structure and a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic structure, with a polycyclic aromatic ring structure or a polycyclic alicyclic structure being preferred, and a polycyclic alicyclic structure being more preferred.
Examples of the aromatic ring structure include a benzene ring structure, a naphthalene structure, and an anthracene structure.
The monocyclic alicyclic structure includes a monocyclic cycloalkyl ring having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
The polycyclic alicyclic structure may be the polycyclic alicyclic structure possessed by the first anion, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
The number of ring structures in the second anion is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 4 or less.
When the second anion has two or more ring structures, the combination is not particularly limited, but it preferably has one or more polycyclic alicyclic structures, and more preferably has a polycyclic alicyclic structure and a monocyclic alicyclic structure.
 第2アニオンとしては、例えば、式(QA3)で表されるアニオンが挙げられる。 An example of the second anion is an anion represented by formula (QA3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 式(QA3)中、Wは、置換基を有していてもよい脂環構造を表す。
 上記脂環構造は、多環及び単環のいずれであってもよいが、多環の脂環構造が好ましい。
 単環の脂環構造としては、例えば、シクロアルカンが挙げられる。上記シクロアルカンの炭素数は、3~8が好ましく、5~6がより好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造の定義及び好適態様は、上述した通りである。
 上記脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数4~8)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アルキルオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~12)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~6)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)、アラルキル基(好ましくは炭素数7~13)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)、及びアシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~5)が挙げられる。
 上記アルコキシ基、上記アルキルオキシカルボニル基、上記アルキルチオ基、上記アシル基、及び上記アシルオキシ基には、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基が含まれ、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。
 上記置換基は、可能な場合は更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基又は上記シクロアルキル基は、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい。
 上記脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基としては、水酸基、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数2~12のアルキルオキシカルボニル基が好ましく、水酸基、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基、又は炭素数3~8のアルキルオキシカルボニル基がより好ましい。
 多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。2つの置換基同士が結合して形成する環としては、例えば、シクロアルカン、環状アセタール、及び環状チオアセタールが挙げられる。
 なお、2つの置換基同士が互いに結合して環を形成する場合、2つの置換基は脂環構造中の同一の炭素原子に結合していてもよいし、異なる炭素原子に結合していてもよい。
 上記2つの置換基同士が互いに結合して形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、上記多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基が挙げられ、水酸基が好ましい。
In formula (QA3), W3 represents an alicyclic structure which may have a substituent.
The alicyclic structure may be either a polycyclic or monocyclic structure, with a polycyclic alicyclic structure being preferred.
The monocyclic alicyclic structure is, for example, a cycloalkane. The cycloalkane preferably has 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and more preferably has 5 to 6 carbon atoms.
The definition and preferred embodiments of the polycyclic alicyclic structure are as described above.
Examples of the substituent that the alicyclic structure may have include a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms), an alkoxy group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an alkyloxycarbonyl group (preferably having 2 to 12 carbon atoms), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably having 6 to 12 carbon atoms), an aralkyl group (preferably having 7 to 13 carbon atoms), an acyl group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms), and an acyloxy group (preferably having 2 to 5 carbon atoms).
The alkoxy group, the alkyloxycarbonyl group, the alkylthio group, the acyl group, and the acyloxy group include an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
The above-mentioned substituents may further have a substituent if possible. For example, the above-mentioned alkyl group or cycloalkyl group may have a halogen atom.
The substituent that the alicyclic structure may have is preferably a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, or an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, and more preferably a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, or an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
When the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Examples of the ring formed by bonding two substituents to each other include cycloalkanes, cyclic acetals, and cyclic thioacetals.
When two substituents are bonded to each other to form a ring, the two substituents may be bonded to the same carbon atom in the alicyclic structure, or may be bonded to different carbon atoms.
The ring formed by bonding the two substituents together may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group is preferred.
 LQ3は、単結合又は2価の置換基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、2価の炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-S-、-SO-、及びこれらを組み合わせた基が挙げられる。ただし、X と隣接する基は、2価の炭化水素基である。
 上記2価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びアリーレン基が挙げられる。
 上記アルキレン基は直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は1~12が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は、単環及び多環のいずれであってもよく、単環が好ましい。上記シクロアルキレン基の炭素数は、3~12が好ましく、4~8がより好ましく、4~6が更に好ましい。シクロアルキレン基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置き換わっていてもよい。
 上記アルケニレン基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。上記アルケニレン基の炭素数は2~12が好ましく、2~6がより好ましい。
 上記アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~12が好ましく、6~10が好ましい。
 上記2価の炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基として例示した基が挙げられ、水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましく、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子がより好ましい。
 LQ3としては、単結合、*W3-O-CO-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*、*W3-CO-O-ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基-*、*W3-CO-O-シクロアルキレン基-*、又は*W3-O-CO-シクロアルキレン基-*が好ましい。*W3はWとの結合位置を表し、*はX との結合位置を表す。
L Q3 represents a single bond or a divalent substituent.
Examples of the divalent linking group include divalent hydrocarbon groups, -O-, -CO-, -S-, -SO 2 -, and combinations of these, provided that the group adjacent to X Q - is a divalent hydrocarbon group.
Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and an arylene group.
The alkylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 1 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
The cycloalkylene group may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic ring, and is preferably a monocyclic ring. The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkylene group is preferably 3 to 12, more preferably 4 to 8, and even more preferably 4 to 6. A methylene group constituting the cycloalkylene group may be replaced by -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -.
The alkenylene group may be either linear or branched, and preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
The arylene group preferably has 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
The divalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom or an iodine atom is more preferable.
L Q3 is preferably a single bond, * W3 -O-CO-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W3 -CO-O-alkylene group-* X which may have a halogen atom, * W3 -CO-O-cycloalkylene group-* X or * W3 -O-CO-cycloalkylene group-* X . * W3 represents the bonding position to W3 , and * X represents the bonding position to XQ- .
 X は、アニオン性基を表す。
 X は、式(Q1)中のX と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
X Q - represents an anionic group.
X Q - has the same meaning as X Q - in formula (Q1), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 式(Q3)で表される第2アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。 Examples of the structure of the second anion represented by formula (Q3), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 式(QA3)で表されるアニオンは、式(QA3-1)で表されるアニオンであることも好ましい。 The anion represented by formula (QA3) is also preferably an anion represented by formula (QA3-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 式(QA3-1)中、W、Y、Y、X 、及び、RQ1は、式(QA1-1)中のW、Y、Y、X 、及び、RQ1と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 なかでも、RQ1は、ハロゲン原子を有していてもよいアルキレン基が好ましい。
 式(QA3-1)中、LQ3は、式(QA3)中のLQ3と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 式(QA3-1)で表される第2アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。
In formula (QA3-1), W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , X Q and R Q1 have the same meanings and preferred embodiments as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , X Q and R Q1 in formula (QA1-1).
Among these, R Q1 is preferably an alkylene group which may have a halogen atom.
In formula (QA3-1), L 3 Q3 has the same meaning as L 3 Q3 in formula (QA3), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
Examples of the structure of the second anion represented by formula (QA3-1), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 第2アニオンとしては、式(QA4)で表されるアニオンも好ましい。 The second anion is preferably an anion represented by formula (QA4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 式(QA4)中、W、Y、Y、LQ1、及びX は、式(QA1-1)におけるW、Y、Y、LQ1、及びX と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
 RQ4は、3価の連結基である。
 上記3価の連結基としては、3価の炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 上記3価の炭化水素基を構成するメチレン基は、-O-、-S-、-CO-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよい。
 上記3価の炭化水素基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、多環の脂環構造が有していてもよい置換基として例示した基が挙げられ、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、又はハロゲン原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~6のアルキル基が好ましく、水酸基、フッ素原子、ヨウ素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよい炭素数1~3のアルキル基がより好ましく、水酸基が更に好ましい。
 上記3価の炭化水素基としては、炭素数3~8の分岐鎖状の脂肪族炭化水素基又は炭素数3~8の3価の単環の脂環基が好ましく、炭素数3~8の3価の単環の脂環基がより好ましい。
In formula (QA4), W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- have the same meanings as W 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , L Q1 and X Q- in formula (QA1-1), and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
R Q4 is a trivalent linking group.
The trivalent linking group includes a trivalent hydrocarbon group.
The methylene group constituting the trivalent hydrocarbon group may be substituted with -O-, -S-, -CO-, or -SO 2 -.
The trivalent hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified as the substituent that the polycyclic alicyclic structure may have, and are preferably a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms which may have a halogen atom, more preferably a hydroxyl group, a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, and still more preferably a hydroxyl group.
The trivalent hydrocarbon group is preferably a branched aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms or a trivalent monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, more preferably a trivalent monocyclic alicyclic group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms.
 式(QA4)で表される第2アニオンの構造の例、並びに、各アニオンのClogP値及び体積V(単位:Å)を示す。 Examples of the structure of the second anion represented by formula (QA4), as well as the ClogP value and volume V (unit: Å 3 ) of each anion are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 第2アニオンとしては、式(QA3)で表されるアニオン又は式(QA4)で表されるアニオンが好ましく、式(QA3)で表されるアニオンがより好ましく、式(QA3-1)で表されるアニオンが更に好ましい。 As the second anion, an anion represented by formula (QA3) or an anion represented by formula (QA4) is preferable, an anion represented by formula (QA3) is more preferable, and an anion represented by formula (QA3-1) is even more preferable.
 第2アニオンとプロトンとが結合してなる酸性化合物CのpKa(C)は、上述のpKa(A)よりも大きければ特に制限されないが、pKa(C)とpKa(A)との差(pKa(C)-pKa(A))は、0.50以上が好ましく、1.00以上がより好ましく、2.00以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、10.00以下が好ましく、8.00以下がより好ましい。
 pKa(C)は、-3.00~8.00が好ましく、-1.00~7.00がより好ましく、0.00~5.00が更に好ましい。
The pKa(C) of the acidic compound C formed by combining the second anion and a proton is not particularly limited as long as it is larger than the above-mentioned pKa(A), but the difference between pKa(C) and pKa(A) (pKa(C)-pKa(A)) is preferably 0.50 or more, more preferably 1.00 or more, and even more preferably 2.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, and it is preferably 10.00 or less, and more preferably 8.00 or less.
The pKa(C) is preferably from −3.00 to 8.00, more preferably from −1.00 to 7.00, and even more preferably from 0.00 to 5.00.
 第2アニオンの体積は、第1アニオンよりも大きく、かつ、250Å以上である。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第2アニオンの体積は260Å以上が好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、500Å以下が好ましく、400Å以下がより好ましい。
 第2アニオンの体積が、250Å未満である場合、未露光部における酸のクエンチ能が低下し、本発明の効果が悪化する点で好ましくない。
 第2アニオンの体積は、上述した方法により算出できる。
The volume of the second anion is larger than that of the first anion and is 250 Å 3 or more.
In terms of obtaining superior effects of the present invention, the volume of the second anion is preferably 260 Å3 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but the volume is preferably 500 Å3 or less, and more preferably 400 Å3 or less.
If the volume of the second anion is less than 250 Å3 , the ability to quench the acid in the unexposed area decreases, which is undesirable since it deteriorates the effect of the present invention.
The volume of the second anion can be calculated by the method described above.
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第2アニオンのClogP値は、-5.00~3.00が好ましく、-3.00~0.00がより好ましく、-2.00~-0.50が更に好ましく、-1.50~-1.00が特に好ましい。 In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the ClogP value of the second anion is preferably -5.00 to 3.00, more preferably -3.00 to 0.00, even more preferably -2.00 to -0.50, and particularly preferably -1.50 to -1.00.
(第2カチオン)
 第1カチオンは特に制限されず、例えば、上記光酸発生剤に含まれ得る有機カチオンが使用できる。
 第2カチオンの好適態様は、第1カチオンと同じである。
 第1カチオン及び第2カチオンは同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
(Second Cation)
The first cation is not particularly limited, and for example, an organic cation that can be contained in the photoacid generator can be used.
The preferred embodiments of the second cation are the same as those of the first cation.
The first cation and the second cation can be the same or different.
 上記第2カチオンのClogP値は、3.00以上が好ましく、5.00以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、20.00以下が好ましく、15.00以下がより好ましい。 The ClogP value of the second cation is preferably 3.00 or more, and more preferably 5.00 or more. There is no particular upper limit, but it is preferably 20.00 or less, and more preferably 15.00 or less.
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第2酸拡散制御剤の含有量は、レジスト組成物の溶媒を除いた全固形分に対して、0.1~30.0質量%が好ましく、1.0~20.0質量%がより好ましく、3.0~10.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、光酸発生剤の含有量に対する、第2酸拡散制御剤の含有量の質量比は、0.1~3.0が好ましく、0.2~2.0がより好ましく、0.3~1.0が更に好ましい。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量に対する、第2酸拡散制御剤の含有量の質量比は、0.1~3.0が好ましく、0.2~2.0がより好ましく、0.3~1.0が更に好ましい。
In terms of obtaining superior effects of the present invention, the content of the second acid diffusion controller is preferably from 0.1 to 30.0 mass %, more preferably from 1.0 to 20.0 mass %, and even more preferably from 3.0 to 10.0 mass %, based on the total solid content excluding the solvent of the resist composition.
In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the mass ratio of the content of the second acid diffusion controller to the content of the photoacid generator is preferably from 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably from 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably from 0.3 to 1.0.
In order to obtain a more excellent effect of the present invention, the mass ratio of the content of the second acid diffusion controller to the content of the first acid diffusion controller is preferably 0.1 to 3.0, more preferably 0.2 to 2.0, and even more preferably 0.3 to 1.0.
 レジスト組成物は、上記以外の酸拡散制御剤を有していてもよい。
 上記以外の酸拡散制御剤としては、例えば、塩基性化合物、窒素原子を有し酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物、及び活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸拡散制御能が低下又は消失する化合物等が挙げられる。
 例えば、国際公開第2020/066824号の段落[0132]~[0164]に記載の化合物、並びに、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号の段落[0627]~[0664]、米国特許出願公開2015/0004544A1号の段落[0095]~[0187]、米国特許出願公開2016/0237190A1号の段落[0403]~[0423]、及び米国特許出願公開2016/0274458A1号の段落[0259]~[0328]に開示された公知の化合物が使用できる。
The resist composition may contain an acid diffusion controller other than those mentioned above.
Examples of acid diffusion control agents other than those mentioned above include basic compounds, low molecular weight compounds having a nitrogen atom and a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and compounds whose acid diffusion control ability is reduced or lost by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
For example, the compounds described in paragraphs [0132] to [0164] of International Publication No. 2020/066824, as well as the known compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0627] to [0664] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1, paragraphs [0095] to [0187] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0004544A1, paragraphs [0403] to [0423] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0237190A1, and paragraphs [0259] to [0328] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0274458A1 can be used.
〔疎水性樹脂〕
 レジスト組成物は、特定樹脂とは異なる疎水性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂はレジスト膜の表面に偏在するように設計されることが好ましいが、界面活性剤とは異なり、必ずしも分子内に親水基を有する必要はなく、極性物質及び非極性物質の均一な混合に寄与しなくてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂の添加による効果として、水に対するレジスト膜表面の静的及び動的な接触角の制御、並びに、アウトガスの抑制が挙げられる。
[Hydrophobic resin]
The resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin that is different from the specific resin.
The hydrophobic resin is preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike a surfactant, it does not necessarily have to have a hydrophilic group in the molecule, and does not necessarily have to contribute to uniform mixing of polar and non-polar substances.
The effects of adding a hydrophobic resin include control of the static and dynamic contact angle of water on the resist film surface, and suppression of outgassing.
 疎水性樹脂は、膜表層への偏在化の点から、フッ素原子、珪素原子、及び樹脂の側鎖部分に含まれたCH部分構造のいずれか1種以上を有することが好ましく、2種以上を有することがより好ましい。
 上記疎水性樹脂は、炭素数5以上の炭化水素基を有することが好ましい。これらの基は樹脂の主鎖中に有していても、側鎖に置換していてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂としては、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0275]~[0279]に記載される化合物が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of uneven distribution on the membrane surface layer, the hydrophobic resin preferably has one or more of a fluorine atom, a silicon atom, and a CH3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin, and more preferably has two or more of them.
The hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having at least 5 carbon atoms. Such a group may be present in the main chain of the resin, or may be substituted on a side chain.
Examples of hydrophobic resins include the compounds described in paragraphs [0275] to [0279] of WO 2020/004306.
 疎水性樹脂は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 レジスト組成物が疎水性樹脂を含む場合、疎水性樹脂の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20.0質量%が好ましく、0.1~15.0質量%がより好ましい。
The hydrophobic resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
When the resist composition contains a hydrophobic resin, the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably from 0.01 to 20.0 mass %, and more preferably from 0.1 to 15.0 mass %, based on the total solid content of the resist composition.
〔界面活性剤〕
 レジスト組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。
 界面活性剤を含む場合、密着性により優れ、現像欠陥のより少ないパターンを形成できる。
 界面活性剤は、フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤が好ましく、環境規制の点から、シリコン系界面活性剤がより好ましい。
 フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0218]及び[0219]に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられる。
[Surfactant]
The resist composition may contain a surfactant.
When a surfactant is contained, a pattern having superior adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
The surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant, and from the standpoint of environmental regulations, a silicon-based surfactant is more preferred.
Examples of the fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraphs [0218] and [0219] of WO 2018/193954.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 レジスト組成物が界面活性剤を含む場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.0005~1.0質量%がより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%が更に好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
When the resist composition contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably from 0.0001 to 2.0 mass %, more preferably from 0.0005 to 1.0 mass %, and even more preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 mass %, relative to the total solid content of the resist composition.
〔溶媒〕
 レジスト組成物は、溶媒を含むことが好ましい。
 溶媒は、(M1)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレート、並びに、(M2)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸エステル、酢酸エステル、アルコキシプロピオン酸エステル、鎖状ケトン、環状ケトン、ラクトン、及びアルキレンカーボネートからなる群より選択される少なくとも1つを含むことが好ましい。
〔solvent〕
The resist composition preferably contains a solvent.
The solvent preferably contains (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) at least one selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactate ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionate ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate.
 上述した溶媒と特定樹脂とを組み合わせると、レジスト組成物の塗布性の向上、及びパターンの現像欠陥数の低減の点で好ましい。上述した溶媒は、上述した樹脂の溶解性、沸点及び粘度のバランスが良いため、レジスト膜の膜厚のムラ及びスピンコート中の析出物の発生等を抑制できる。
 成分(M1)及び成分(M2)の詳細は、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0218]~[0226]に記載され、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The combination of the above-mentioned solvent and the specific resin is preferable in terms of improving the coatability of the resist composition and reducing the number of development defects of the pattern. The above-mentioned solvent has a good balance of the solubility, boiling point, and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, so that it can suppress unevenness in the thickness of the resist film and the occurrence of precipitates during spin coating.
Details of the components (M1) and (M2) are described in paragraphs [0218] to [0226] of WO 2020/004306, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 上記溶媒は、成分(M1)及び成分(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。
 溶媒が成分(M1)及び成分(M2)以外の成分を更に含む場合、成分(M1)及び成分(M2)以外の成分の含有量は、溶媒の全量に対して、5~30質量%が好ましい。
The solvent may further contain a component other than the component (M1) and the component (M2).
When the solvent further contains a component other than the component (M1) and the component (M2), the content of the component other than the component (M1) and the component (M2) is preferably 5 to 30 mass % based on the total amount of the solvent.
 レジスト組成物の塗布性がより向上する点で、レジスト組成物中の溶媒の含有量は、70~99.5質量%が好ましく、80~99質量%が好ましい。 In order to further improve the coatability of the resist composition, the content of the solvent in the resist composition is preferably 70 to 99.5% by mass, and more preferably 80 to 99% by mass.
〔その他の添加剤〕
 レジスト組成物は、上記以外のその他の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
 その他の添加剤としては、溶解阻止化合物(酸の作用によって分解して有機系現像液中での溶解性が減少する、分子量3000以下の化合物)、染料、可塑剤、光増感剤、光吸収剤、及び現像液に対する溶解性を促進させる化合物(例えば、分子量1000以下のフェノール化合物、及びカルボニル基を含んだ脂環族若しくは脂肪族化合物)が挙げられる。
[Other additives]
The resist composition may contain additives other than those mentioned above.
Other additives include dissolution-inhibiting compounds (compounds with a molecular weight of 3000 or less that are decomposed by the action of acid and have reduced solubility in organic developers), dyes, plasticizers, photosensitizers, light absorbers, and compounds that promote solubility in developers (for example, phenol compounds with a molecular weight of 1000 or less, and alicyclic or aliphatic compounds containing a carbonyl group).
 レジスト組成物は、水を含んでいてもよいが、その含有量が少ないことが好ましい。
 水の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全質量に対して、1~30000質量ppmの場合が多く、10000質量ppm以下が好ましく、5000質量ppm以下がより好ましく、1000質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されず、0質量ppmが好ましい。
The resist composition may contain water, but it is preferable that the water content is small.
The content of water is often 1 to 30,000 ppm by mass relative to the total mass of the resist composition, and is preferably 10,000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 5,000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 1,000 ppm by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppm by mass is preferable.
 レジスト組成物は、残存モノマーを含んでいてもよいが、その含有量が少ないことが好ましい。上記残存モノマーとしては、例えば、上記特定樹脂の合成に使用されたモノマーが挙げられる。
 残存モノマーの含有量は、レジスト組成物の全質量に対して、1~30000質量ppmの場合が多く、10000質量ppm以下が好ましく、5000質量ppm以下がより好ましく、1000質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されず、0質量ppmが好ましい。
The resist composition may contain residual monomers, but the content thereof is preferably small. Examples of the residual monomers include monomers used in the synthesis of the specific resin.
The content of the residual monomer is often 1 to 30,000 ppm by mass relative to the total mass of the resist composition, and is preferably 10,000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 5,000 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 1,000 ppm by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppm by mass is preferable.
 本明細書のレジスト組成物は、EUV露光用レジスト組成物として好適に用いられる。
 EUV光は波長13.5nmであり、ArF(波長193nm)光等に比べて、より短波長であるため、同じ感度で露光された際の入射フォトン数が少ない。そのため、確率的にフォトンの数がばらつく“フォトンショットノイズ”の影響が大きく、LERの悪化及びブリッジ欠陥を招く。フォトンショットノイズを減らすには、露光量を大きくして入射フォトン数を増やす方法があるが、高感度化の要求とトレードオフとなる。
The resist composition of the present specification is suitably used as a resist composition for EUV exposure.
EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than ArF light (wavelength 193 nm) and the like, and therefore the number of incident photons is smaller when exposed at the same sensitivity. Therefore, the effect of "photon shot noise," which is the stochastic variation in the number of photons, is large, leading to deterioration of LER and bridge defects. One method of reducing photon shot noise is to increase the exposure dose to increase the number of incident photons, but this is a trade-off with the demand for higher sensitivity.
[パターン形成方法]
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、以下の工程を含む。
 工程1:レジスト組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程
 工程2:レジスト膜を露光する工程
 工程3:現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像して、レジストパターンを形成する工程
 なお、各工程は1回のみ実施してもよく、複数回実施してもよい。
 以下、各工程について詳述する。
[Pattern formation method]
The pattern forming method of the present invention includes the following steps.
Step 1: A step of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition. Step 2: A step of exposing the resist film. Step 3: A step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer to form a resist pattern. Each step may be performed only once or multiple times.
Each step will be described in detail below.
〔工程1:レジスト膜形成工程〕
 工程1は、レジスト組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程である。
 レジスト組成物の定義は、上述の通りである。
[Step 1: Resist film formation step]
Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition.
The resist composition is as defined above.
 レジスト組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する方法としては、例えば、レジスト組成物を基板上に塗布する方法が挙げられる。
 なお、塗布前にレジスト組成物を必要に応じてフィルター濾過することが好ましい。フィルターのポアサイズは、0.1μm以下が好ましく、0.05μm以下がより好ましく、0.03μm以下が更に好ましい。また、フィルターは、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、又はナイロン製が好ましい。
An example of a method for forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition is a method in which the resist composition is applied onto a substrate.
It is preferable to filter the resist composition before coating as necessary. The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 μm or less, more preferably 0.05 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.03 μm or less. The filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
 基板としては、特に制限されず、IC等の半導体の製造工程又は液晶若しくはサーマルヘッド等の回路基板の製造工程、及びその他のフォトファブリケーションのリソグラフィー工程等で一般的に用いられる基板を使用できる。具体的には、例えば、シリコン、SiO、及びSiN等の無機基板等が挙げられる。
 なお、レジスト膜の下層に、下地膜(例えば、無機膜、有機膜、及び反射防止膜)を形成してもよい。
The substrate is not particularly limited, and may be a substrate generally used in the manufacturing process of semiconductors such as ICs, or circuit boards such as liquid crystal or thermal heads, and in other lithography processes for photofabrication, etc. Specific examples include inorganic substrates such as silicon, SiO 2 , and SiN.
In addition, an undercoat film (for example, an inorganic film, an organic film, or an anti-reflective film) may be formed under the resist film.
 レジスト組成物は、例えば、基板上に、スピナー又はコーター等を用いて塗布できる。塗布方法としては、スピナーを用いたスピン塗布が好ましい。スピナーを用いたスピン塗布をする際の回転数は、1000~3000rpmが好ましい。 The resist composition can be applied onto a substrate, for example, using a spinner or coater. The preferred application method is spin coating using a spinner. The rotation speed when spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
 レジスト組成物の塗布後、乾燥処理を実施してレジスト膜を形成してもよい。乾燥方法としては、例えば、加熱して乾燥する方法が挙げられる。加熱は通常の露光機、及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて実施してもよい。
 加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。加熱時間は30~1000秒が好ましく、60~800秒がより好ましく、60~600秒が更に好ましい。
After coating the resist composition, a drying treatment may be carried out to form a resist film. As a drying method, for example, a method of drying by heating may be mentioned. Heating may be carried out by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or a developing machine, and may be carried out using a hot plate or the like.
The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150° C., more preferably 80 to 140° C., and even more preferably 80 to 130° C. The heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, and even more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
 レジスト膜の膜厚は特に制限されないが、より高精度な微細パターンを形成できる点から、10~120nmが好ましい。なかでも、EUV露光を実施する場合、レジスト膜の膜厚は、10~65nmがより好ましく、15~50nmが更に好ましい。また、ArF液浸露光を実施する場合、レジスト膜の膜厚は、10~120nmがより好ましく、15~90nmが更に好ましい。 The thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 120 nm, since it allows for the formation of fine patterns with higher accuracy. In particular, when EUV exposure is performed, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 65 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 50 nm. Furthermore, when ArF immersion exposure is performed, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 120 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 90 nm.
 なお、レジスト膜の上層にトップコート組成物を用いてトップコートを形成してもよい。
 トップコート組成物は、レジスト膜と混合せず、更にレジスト膜上に均一に塗布できる組成物が好ましい。
 トップコートの膜厚は、10~200nmが好ましく、20~100nmがより好ましく、40~80nmが更に好ましい。
 トップコートの組成及び形成方法は特に限定されず、公知のトップコートを公知の方法を用いて形成できる。例えば、特開2014-059543号公報の段落[0072]~[0082]の記載に基づいてトップコートを形成できる。
 例えば、特開2013-061648号公報に記載された塩基性化合物を含むトップコートを、レジスト膜上に形成することが好ましい。また、トップコートは、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、水酸基、チオール基、カルボニル基、及びエステル基からなる群より選択される基又は結合を少なくとも一つ含む化合物を含むことも好ましい。
A top coat may be formed on the resist film using a top coat composition.
The top coat composition is preferably a composition that does not mix with the resist film and can be applied uniformly onto the resist film.
The thickness of the top coat is preferably from 10 to 200 nm, more preferably from 20 to 100 nm, and even more preferably from 40 to 80 nm.
The composition and method of forming the top coat are not particularly limited, and a known top coat can be formed using a known method. For example, the top coat can be formed based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP2014-059543A.
For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound described in JP 2013-061648 A on a resist film. It is also preferable that the top coat contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl group, and an ester group.
〔工程2:露光工程〕
 工程2は、レジスト膜を露光する工程である。
 露光の方法としては、形成したレジスト膜に所定のマスクを通して活性光線又は放射線を照射する方法が挙げられる。
 活性光線又は放射線としては、赤外光、可視光、紫外光、遠紫外光、極紫外光、X線、及び電子線が挙げられ、250nm以下が好ましく、220nm以下がより好ましく、1~200nmの波長の遠紫外光、具体的には、KrFエキシマレーザー(248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(193nm)、F2エキシマレーザー(157nm)、EUV(13.5nm)、X線、及び電子ビームが特に好ましい。
[Step 2: Exposure Step]
Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film to light.
The exposure method may be a method in which the formed resist film is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation through a predetermined mask.
Examples of the actinic ray or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, and electron beams, preferably having a wavelength of 250 nm or less, more preferably having a wavelength of 220 nm or less, and particularly preferably having a wavelength of 1 to 200 nm, specifically, KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimer laser (193 nm), F2 excimer laser (157 nm), EUV (13.5 nm), X-rays, and electron beams.
 露光後、現像を行う前に露光後加熱処理(露光後ベーク、PEB:Post Exposure Bake)を行うことが好ましい。露光後加熱処理により露光部の反応が促進され、感度及びパターン形状がより良好となる。加熱は通常の露光機及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて実施してもよい。
 加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。
 加熱時間は10~1000秒が好ましく、10~180秒がより好ましく、30~120秒が更に好ましい。
After exposure, it is preferable to perform post-exposure baking (PEB) before development. The post-exposure baking promotes the reaction of the exposed area, resulting in better sensitivity and pattern shape. Heating can be performed by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or development machine, and may be performed using a hot plate or the like.
The heating temperature is preferably from 80 to 150°C, more preferably from 80 to 140°C, and even more preferably from 80 to 130°C.
The heating time is preferably from 10 to 1,000 seconds, more preferably from 10 to 180 seconds, and even more preferably from 30 to 120 seconds.
〔工程3:現像工程〕
 工程3は、現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像して、レジストパターンを得る工程である。
 現像液は、アルカリ現像液であっても、有機溶媒を含む現像液(以下、「有機系現像液」ともいう。)であってもよい。
[Step 3: Development Step]
Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film with a developer to obtain a resist pattern.
The developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter, also referred to as an "organic developer").
 現像方法としては、例えば、現像液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、基板表面に現像液を表面張力によって盛り上げて一定時間静止して現像する方法(パドル法)、基板表面に現像液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)、及び一定速度で回転している基板上に一定速度で現像液吐出ノズルをスキャンしながら現像液を吐出しつづける方法(ダイナミックディスペンス法)が挙げられる。
 現像を行う工程の後に、現像液を他の溶媒に置換しながら、現像を停止する工程を実施してもよい。
 現像時間は未露光部の樹脂が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に限定はなく、10~300秒が好ましく、20~120秒がより好ましい。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃がより好ましい。
Examples of the developing method include a method of immersing a substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), a method of piling up the developing solution on the substrate surface by surface tension and leaving it still for a certain period of time to develop (paddle method), a method of spraying the developing solution on the substrate surface (spray method), and a method of continuously discharging the developing solution while scanning a developing solution discharge nozzle at a constant speed onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic dispense method).
After the step of developing, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while replacing the developer with another solvent.
The developing time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed area is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably from 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably from 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developer is preferably from 0 to 50°C, and more preferably from 15 to 35°C.
 アルカリ現像液は、アルカリを含むアルカリ水溶液を用いることが好ましい。アルカリ水溶液の種類は、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドに代表される4級アンモニウム塩、無機アルカリ、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アルコールアミン又は環状アミン等を含むアルカリ溶液が挙げられる。なかでも、アルカリ現像液は、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)に代表される4級アンモニウム塩の水溶液であることが好ましい。
 アルカリ現像液には、アルコール類を適当量添加してもよい。アルカリ現像液の塩基性化合物濃度は、通常、0.1~20質量%である。また、アルカリ現像液のpHは、通常、10.0~15.0である。
The alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous alkaline solution containing an alkali. Examples of the type of the aqueous alkaline solution include an alkaline solution containing a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, or a cyclic amine. Among them, the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH).
The alkaline developer may contain an appropriate amount of alcohol. The alkaline developer usually has a basic compound concentration of 0.1 to 20% by mass. The alkaline developer usually has a pH of 10.0 to 15.0.
 有機系現像液は、ケトン系溶媒、エステル系溶媒、アルコール系溶媒、アミド系溶媒、エーテル系溶媒、及び炭化水素系溶媒からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。上記ケトン系溶媒及びエステル系溶媒としては、特開2022-125078号公報の段落[0179]~[0180]に記載の有機溶媒が、アルコール系溶媒、アミド系溶媒、エーテル系溶媒、及び炭化水素系溶媒としては、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号明細書の段落<0715>~<0718>に開示された溶媒を使用できる。 The organic developer preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents. As the ketone solvents and ester solvents, the organic solvents described in paragraphs [0179] to [0180] of JP 2022-125078 A can be used, and as the alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents, the solvents disclosed in paragraphs <0715> to <0718> of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167 A1 can be used.
 有機系現像液に含まれる有機溶媒は、複数混合してもよく、水と混合してもよい。
有機系現像液全体の含水率は、50質量%未満が好ましく、20質量%未満がより好ましく、10質量%未満が更に好ましく、実質的に水分を含まないことが特に好ましい。
 有機系現像液における有機溶媒の含有量は、現像液の全質量に対して、50~100質量%が好ましく、80~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましく、95~100質量%が特に好ましい。
 上記現像液は、必要に応じて界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。
The organic solvent contained in the organic developer may be a mixture of two or more organic solvents, or may be mixed with water.
The water content of the entire organic developer is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, even more preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
The content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably from 50 to 100% by mass, more preferably from 80 to 100% by mass, still more preferably from 90 to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably from 95 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the developer.
The developer may contain a surfactant, if necessary.
〔その他の工程〕
 上記パターン形成方法は、工程3の後に、リンス液を用いてパターンを洗浄するリンス工程を含むことが好ましい。
[Other steps]
The above pattern forming method preferably includes, after step 3, a rinsing step of cleaning the pattern with a rinsing liquid.
 リンス液は、パターンを溶解しないものであれば特に制限されない。
 アルカリ現像液を用い現像工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液としては、例えば、純水が挙げられる。
 有機系現像液を用いた現像工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液としては、パターンを溶解しない一般的な有機溶媒を含む溶液が使用できる。リンス液に含まれる有機溶媒としては、炭化水素系溶媒、ケトン系溶媒、エステル系溶媒、アルコール系溶媒、アミド系溶媒、及びエーテル系溶媒からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の有機溶媒が好ましい。
 リンス液には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
The rinsing liquid is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the pattern.
The rinsing liquid used in the rinsing step after the development step using an alkaline developer is, for example, pure water.
As a rinse liquid used in a rinse step following a development step using an organic developer, a solution containing a general organic solvent that does not dissolve the pattern can be used. The organic solvent contained in the rinse liquid is preferably at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of hydrocarbon solvents, ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, and ether solvents.
A suitable amount of a surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
 上記洗浄方法は特に限定されず、例えば、一定速度で回転している基板上にリンス液を吐出しつづける方法(回転塗布法)、リンス液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、及び基板表面にリンス液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)が挙げられる。 The above cleaning method is not particularly limited, and examples include a method in which the rinse solution is continuously discharged onto a substrate rotating at a constant speed (spin coating method), a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with the rinse solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method in which the rinse solution is sprayed onto the substrate surface (spray method).
 上記パターン形成方法は、リンス工程の後の加熱工程(Post Bake)を含んでいてもよい。本工程により、パターン間及びパターン内部に残留した現像液及びリンス液が除去される。また、本工程により、レジストパターンがなまされ、パターンの表面荒れが改善される。
 上記リンス工程の後の加熱工程は、40~250℃(好ましくは90~200℃)で、10秒間~3分間(好ましくは30秒間~120秒間)行うことが好ましい。
The pattern forming method may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. This step removes the developer and rinsing solution remaining between and inside the patterns. This step also anneals the resist pattern, improving the surface roughness of the pattern.
The heating step after the rinsing step is preferably carried out at 40 to 250° C. (preferably 90 to 200° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
 形成されたパターンをマスクとして、被エッチング物である基板のエッチング処理を実施してもよい。つまり、工程3にて形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は下地膜及び基板)を加工して、基板にパターンを形成してもよい。
 基板(又は下地膜及び基板)の加工方法は特に制限されないが、工程3で形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は下地膜及び基板)に対してドライエッチングを行うことにより、基板にパターンを形成する方法が好ましい。ドライエッチングは、酸素プラズマエッチングが好ましい。
The formed pattern may be used as a mask to perform an etching process on the substrate, which is the object to be etched. In other words, the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the base film and the substrate) to form a pattern on the substrate.
Although the method for processing the substrate (or the undercoat film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, a method is preferred in which the substrate (or the undercoat film and the substrate) is dry-etched using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask to form a pattern on the substrate. The dry etching is preferably oxygen plasma etching.
 レジスト組成物及び本発明のパターン形成方法において使用される各種材料(例えば、溶媒、現像液、リンス液、反射防止膜形成用組成物、及びトップコート形成用組成物等)は、金属等の不純物を含まないことが好ましい。これら材料に含まれる不純物の含有量は、1質量ppm以下が好ましく、10質量ppb以下がより好ましく、100質量ppt以下が更に好ましく、10質量ppt以下が特に好ましく、1質量ppt以下が最も好ましい。下限は特に制限されず、0質量pptが好ましい。ここで、金属不純物としては、例えば、Na、K、Ca、Fe、Cu、Mg、Al、Li、Cr、Ni、Sn、Ag、As、Au、Ba、Cd、Co、Pb、Ti、V、W、及びZn等が挙げられる。 The resist composition and various materials used in the pattern formation method of the present invention (e.g., solvent, developer, rinse solution, anti-reflective film forming composition, top coat forming composition, etc.) preferably do not contain impurities such as metals. The content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb or less, even more preferably 100 mass ppt or less, particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and most preferably 1 mass ppt or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 mass ppt is preferable. Here, examples of metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, W, and Zn.
 各種材料から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、フィルターを用いた濾過が挙げられる。フィルターを用いた濾過は、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0321]に記載の方法を使用できる。 An example of a method for removing impurities such as metals from various materials is filtration using a filter. For filtration using a filter, the method described in paragraph [0321] of WO 2020/004306 can be used.
 各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減する方法としては、例えば、各種材料を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する方法、各種材料を構成する原料に対してフィルター濾過を行う方法、及び装置内をテフロン(登録商標)でライニングする等してコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う方法等も挙げられる。 Methods for reducing metal and other impurities contained in various materials include, for example, selecting raw materials with low metal content as the raw materials that make up the various materials, filtering the raw materials that make up the various materials, and performing distillation under conditions that minimize contamination as much as possible, such as lining the inside of the equipment with Teflon (registered trademark).
 フィルター濾過の他、吸着材による不純物の除去を行ってもよく、フィルター濾過と吸着材とを組み合わせて使用してもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を使用でき、例えば、シリカゲル及びゼオライト等の無機系吸着材、並びに、活性炭等の有機系吸着材を使用できる。上記各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減するためには、製造工程における金属不純物の混入を防止する必要がある。製造装置から金属不純物が十分に除去されたかどうかは、製造装置の洗浄に使用された洗浄液中に含まれる金属成分の含有量を測定して確認できる。使用後の洗浄液に含まれる金属成分の含有量は、100質量ppt(parts per trillion)以下が好ましく、10質量ppt以下がより好ましく、1質量ppt以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限させず、0質量ppt以上が好ましい。 In addition to filtration, impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filtration and an adsorbent may be used. As the adsorbent, known adsorbents may be used, for example, inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon. In order to reduce impurities such as metals contained in the various materials, it is necessary to prevent the incorporation of metal impurities in the manufacturing process. Whether metal impurities have been sufficiently removed from the manufacturing equipment can be confirmed by measuring the content of metal components contained in the cleaning solution used to clean the manufacturing equipment. The content of metal components contained in the cleaning solution after use is preferably 100 parts per trillion (ppt) by mass or less, more preferably 10 ppt by mass or less, and even more preferably 1 ppt by mass or less. There is no particular lower limit, and 0 ppt by mass or more is preferable.
 現像液及びリンス液等の有機系処理液には、静電気の帯電、引き続き生じる静電気放電に伴う、薬液配管及び各種パーツ(フィルター、O-リング、及びチューブ等)の故障を防止するため、導電性の化合物を添加してもよい。導電性の化合物は特に制限されないが、例えば、メタノールが挙げられる。添加量は特に制限されないが、好ましい現像特性又はリンス特性を維持する点で、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、0.01質量%以上が好ましい。
 薬液配管としては、例えば、SUS(ステンレス鋼)、又は帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、若しくは、フッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン又はパーフロオロアルコキシ樹脂等)で被膜された各種配管を使用できる。フィルター及びO-リングに関しても同様に、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、又はフッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン又はパーフロオロアルコキシ樹脂等)を使用できる。
A conductive compound may be added to an organic processing liquid such as a developer and a rinse liquid in order to prevent breakdown of chemical piping and various parts (such as filters, O-rings, and tubes) due to static charging and subsequent static discharge. The conductive compound is not particularly limited, but an example thereof is methanol. The amount added is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of maintaining favorable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics, it is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0.01% by mass or more is preferable.
The chemical liquid piping may be made of, for example, stainless steel (SUS), or various piping coated with antistatic polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.). Similarly, the filter and O-ring may be made of antistatic polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.).
[デバイスの製造方法]
 本発明は、上記のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法、及びこの製造方法により製造された電子デバイスにも関する。
 本発明の電子デバイスは、電気電子機器(家電、OA(Office Automation)、メディア関連機器、光学用機器、及び通信機器等)に好適に搭載される。
[Device Manufacturing Method]
The present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device, which includes the above-mentioned pattern formation method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
The electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted in electric and electronic equipment (such as home appliances, OA (Office Automation), media-related equipment, optical equipment, and communication equipment).
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。
 以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更できる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきではない。
The present invention will be described in further detail below with reference to examples.
The materials, amounts, ratios, processing contents, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be interpreted as being limited by the following examples.
[レジスト組成物の調製]
 実施例及び比較例に用いたレジスト組成物に含まれる各成分を以下に示す。
[Preparation of resist composition]
The components contained in the resist compositions used in the examples and comparative examples are shown below.
〔樹脂〕
 樹脂(P-1)~(P-10)に含まれる繰り返し単位を与えるモノマーの構造を以下に示す。
〔resin〕
The structures of the monomers that give the repeating units contained in the resins (P-1) to (P-10) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 表1に、各実施例及び比較例の樹脂(P-1)~(P-10)の組成を示す。
 なお、表1中、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び多分散度(「PDI」(Mw/Mn))はGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。また、表1中の「含有量[mol%]」欄は、樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の含有量(mol%)を表す。
Table 1 shows the compositions of the resins (P-1) to (P-10) of the respective examples and comparative examples.
In Table 1, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and polydispersity index ("PDI" (Mw/Mn)) are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)). The "content [mol %]" column in Table 1 indicates the content (mol %) of each repeating unit relative to the total repeating units in the resin.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000041
〔光酸発生剤及び酸拡散制御剤〕
 各実施例及び比較例の光酸発生剤及び酸拡散制御剤に含まれるカチオン(C-1)~(C-8)の構造を以下に示す。
[Photoacid generator and acid diffusion controller]
The structures of the cations (C-1) to (C-8) contained in the photoacid generators and acid diffusion controllers of the respective Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 以下に、各実施例及び比較例の光酸発生剤に含まれるアニオン(PA-1)~(PA-2)及び各アニオンがプロトンと結合してなる酸性化合物のpKaを示す。 Below are the anions (PA-1) to (PA-2) contained in the photoacid generators of each Example and Comparative Example, and the pKa of the acidic compounds formed when each anion is bonded to a proton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 以下に、各実施例の第1酸拡散制御剤に含まれる第1アニオン(A1-1)~(A1-5)及び各比較例の第1酸拡散制御剤に含まれるアニオン(CA1-1)~(CA1-2)、並びに、各アニオンがプロトンと結合してなる酸性化合物のpKaを示す。 Below are shown the first anions (A1-1) to (A1-5) contained in the first acid diffusion controller of each Example, the anions (CA1-1) to (CA1-2) contained in the first acid diffusion controller of each Comparative Example, and the pKa of the acidic compound formed when each anion is bonded to a proton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 以下に、各実施例の第2酸拡散制御剤に含まれる第2アニオン(A2-1)~(A2-6)及び各比較例の第2酸拡散制御剤に含まれるアニオン(CA2-1)~(CA2-2)、並びに、各アニオンがプロトンと結合してなる酸性化合物のpKaを示す。 Below are shown the second anions (A2-1) to (A2-6) contained in the second acid diffusion controller of each Example, the anions (CA2-1) to (CA2-2) contained in the second acid diffusion controller of each Comparative Example, and the pKa of the acidic compound formed when each anion is bonded to a proton.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 各実施例及び比較例の光酸発生剤並びに第1酸拡散制御剤及び第2酸拡散制御剤は、表1に示すカチオンとアニオンとからなる化合物である。例えば、実施例1で使用される第1酸拡散制御剤は、カチオン(C-1)(第1カチオン)と、アニオン(A1-1)(第1アニオン)とからなる化合物であり、下記構造で表される。 The photoacid generator, first acid diffusion controller, and second acid diffusion controller in each of the examples and comparative examples are compounds consisting of the cations and anions shown in Table 1. For example, the first acid diffusion controller used in Example 1 is a compound consisting of a cation (C-1) (first cation) and an anion (A1-1) (first anion), and is represented by the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
〔溶媒〕
 レジスト組成物の溶媒としては、以下の組成の混合溶媒を使用した。
 ・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート  79質量%
 ・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル       20質量%
 ・γ-ブチロラクトン                   1質量%
〔solvent〕
As a solvent for the resist composition, a mixed solvent having the following composition was used.
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 79% by mass
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 20% by mass
γ-butyrolactone 1% by mass
〔疎水性樹脂〕
 疎水性樹脂(D-1)~(D-8)に含まれる各繰り返し単位を与えるモノマーの構造を以下に示す。
[Hydrophobic resin]
The structures of the monomers that give the respective repeating units contained in the hydrophobic resins (D-1) to (D-8) are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 表2に、各疎水性樹脂(D-1)~(D-8)の組成を示す。
 なお、表2中、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び多分散度(「PDI」(Mw/Mn))はGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。また、表2中の「含有量[mol%]」欄は、樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の含有量(mol%)を表す。
Table 2 shows the composition of each of the hydrophobic resins (D-1) to (D-8).
In Table 2, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and polydispersity index ("PDI" (Mw/Mn)) are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)). The "content [mol %]" column in Table 2 indicates the content (mol %) of each repeating unit relative to the total repeating units in the resin.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000048
〔界面活性剤〕
 レジスト組成物に添加剤として用いた界面活性剤(E-1)~(E-3)を以下に示す。
 ・E-1:メガファックF176(DIC社製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
 ・E-2:メガファックR08(DIC社製、フッ素及びシリコン系界面活性剤)
 ・E-3:PF656(OMNOVA社製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
[Surfactant]
The surfactants (E-1) to (E-3) used as additives in the resist composition are shown below.
E-1: Megafac F176 (manufactured by DIC, fluorosurfactant)
E-2: Megafac R08 (manufactured by DIC, fluorine and silicon surfactant)
E-3: PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorosurfactant)
 各成分及び溶媒を、表3に示す割合で混合して混合液を調製した。溶媒は、固形分濃度が2.5質量%となるように添加した。
 得られた混合液を、孔径0.1μmのポアサイズを有するUPE(ultra high molecular weight polyethylene)フィルター、孔径0.02μmのポアサイズを有するNylonフィルター、及び孔径0.01μmのポアサイズを有するUPEフィルターを用いてこの順で濾過し、各実施例及び比較例のレジスト組成物を得た。
A mixed liquid was prepared by mixing the components and the solvent in the ratio shown in Table 3. The solvent was added so that the solid concentration was 2.5 mass %.
The resulting mixture was filtered in this order through a UPE (ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) filter having a pore size of 0.1 μm, a Nylon filter having a pore size of 0.02 μm, and a UPE filter having a pore size of 0.01 μm, to obtain resist compositions of each of the Examples and Comparative Examples.
[有機溶媒現像によるレジストパターンの形成(パターン1の形成)]
 シリコンウエハ上に、下地膜形成用組成物AL412(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚5nmの下地膜を形成した。次いで、得られた下地膜上に、各実施例及び比較例のレジスト組成物を塗布し、90℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚35nmのレジスト膜を形成した。
 得られたレジスト膜が塗布されたウエハに対して、Exitech社製EUV露光装置(Micro Exposure Tool、NA(開口数)0.3、Quadrupole、アウターシグマ0.68、インナーシグマ0.36)を用いてパターン露光を行った。露光マスクとしては、線幅20nm、スペース幅20nmのラインアンドスペースパターンのものを使用した。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、酢酸ブチルを現像液として用いて30秒間現像した。これをスピン乾燥し、ネガ型の線幅20nm、スペース幅20nmのラインアンドスペースパターンを得た。
[Formation of Resist Pattern by Organic Solvent Development (Formation of Pattern 1)]
A base film-forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a thickness of 5 nm. Next, the resist composition of each of the examples and comparative examples was applied onto the obtained base film and baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of 35 nm.
The wafer coated with the resist film was subjected to pattern exposure using an EUV exposure apparatus (Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36) manufactured by Exitech Corp. As the exposure mask, a line and space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm was used.
The exposed resist film was baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds, and then developed for 30 seconds using butyl acetate as a developer, followed by spin drying to obtain a negative-type line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm.
[アルカリ水溶液現像によるレジストパターンの形成(パターン2の形成)]
 シリコンウエハ上に、下地膜形成用組成物AL412(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚5nmの下地膜を形成した。次いで、得られた下地膜上に、各実施例及び比較例のレジスト組成物を塗布し、90℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚30nmのレジスト膜を形成した。
 得られたレジスト膜が塗布されたウエハに対して、Exitech社製EUV露光装置(Micro Exposure Tool、NA(開口数)0.3、Quadrupole、アウターシグマ0.68、インナーシグマ0.36)を用いてパターン露光を行った。露光マスクとしては、線幅20nm、スペース幅20nmのラインアンドスペースパターンのものを使用した。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド水溶液(2.38質量%濃度)を現像液として用いて、30秒間現像した。純水で30秒間リンスした後、これをスピン乾燥して、ポジ型の線幅20nm、スペース幅20nmのラインアンドスペースパターンを得た。
[Formation of Resist Pattern by Alkaline Aqueous Solution Development (Formation of Pattern 2)]
A base film-forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer and baked at 205° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a thickness of 5 nm. Next, the resist composition of each of the Examples and Comparative Examples was applied onto the obtained base film and baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a thickness of 30 nm.
The wafer coated with the resist film was subjected to pattern exposure using an EUV exposure device (Micro Exposure Tool, NA (numerical aperture) 0.3, Quadruple, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36) manufactured by Exitech Corp. An exposure mask having a line and space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm was used.
The exposed resist film was baked at 90° C. for 60 seconds, and then developed for 30 seconds using a tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution (concentration: 2.38% by mass) as a developer. After rinsing with pure water for 30 seconds, the resist film was spin-dried to obtain a positive-type line-and-space pattern with a line width of 20 nm and a space width of 20 nm.
[LWR評価]
 最適露光量にて解像した上記ラインアンドスペースパターンについて、測長走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM((株)日立製作所S-9380II))を用いてパターン上部から観察した。任意の箇所でラインアンドスペースパターンの線幅を測定し、得られた全測定値の標準偏差をσとした際の3σ(nm)を算出した。得られた3σの値から、LWRを下記評価基準に従って評価した。
[LWR evaluation]
The line and space pattern resolved at the optimum exposure dose was observed from above the pattern using a critical dimension scanning electron microscope (SEM (S-9380II, Hitachi, Ltd.)). The line width of the line and space pattern was measured at any point, and 3σ (nm) was calculated when σ was the standard deviation of all the measured values obtained. From the obtained 3σ value, the LWR was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
 5:3σが3.0nm以下
 4:3σが3.0nm超3.5nm以下
 3:3σが3.5nm超4.0nm以下
 2:3σが4.0nm超4.5nm以下
 1:3σが4.5nm超
5: 3σ is 3.0 nm or less 4: 3σ is more than 3.0 nm and less than 3.5 nm 3: 3σ is more than 3.5 nm and less than 4.0 nm 2: 3σ is more than 4.0 nm and less than 4.5 nm 1: 3σ is more than 4.5 nm
[結果]
 各レジスト組成物の組成及びパターン1のLWR評価結果を表3及び表4に示す。
 表3及び表4中、含有量[wt%]は、各成分の、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対する含有量(wt%)を表す。
 表3及び表4中、pKa(A)は、上述の酸解離定数Aを意味し、pKa(B)は上述の酸解離定数Bを意味し、pKa(C)は上述の酸解離定数Cを意味する。
 表3及び表4中、ClogP値は、ChemDrawProfessional(バージョン20.1.1.125、PerkinElmer社製)を用いて、上述の方法を用いて算出した値である。
 表3及び表4中、体積は、Winmostar(QM)(バージョン20.1.1.125、X-Ability社製)を用いて、上述の方法を用いて算出した値である。
 表4は表3の続きである。例えば、実施例1のレジスト組成物は、表3に記載の第1アニオンA1-1と、表4に記載の樹脂P-1とを含むことを表す。
[result]
The components of each resist composition and the LWR evaluation results of pattern 1 are shown in Tables 3 and 4.
In Tables 3 and 4, the content [wt %] indicates the content (wt %) of each component relative to the total solid content of the resist composition.
In Tables 3 and 4, pKa(A) means the above-mentioned acid dissociation constant A, pKa(B) means the above-mentioned acid dissociation constant B, and pKa(C) means the above-mentioned acid dissociation constant C.
In Tables 3 and 4, the ClogP values were calculated using ChemDraw Professional (version 20.1.1.125, manufactured by PerkinElmer) according to the method described above.
In Tables 3 and 4, the volumes are values calculated using Winmostar (QM) (version 20.1.1.125, manufactured by X-Ability) using the method described above.
Table 4 is a continuation of Table 3. For example, the resist composition of Example 1 contains the first anion A1-1 shown in Table 3 and the resin P-1 shown in Table 4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000050
 表3及び表4の結果から、本発明のレジスト組成物は、LWRが小さいレジストパターンを形成できることが確認された。
 実施例1~3及び5の比較から、第1アニオンの体積が、200Å以下である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例1及び6~9の比較から、第1カチオンのClogP値が、5.00以上である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例1及び10~13の比較から、第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量が、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、15質量%以下である場合、本発明の効果がより優れる事が確認された。
 実施例1、4、及び13~17の比較から、第1酸拡散制御剤及び第2酸拡散制御剤から選択される少なくとも1つが、フッ素原子を有する場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。
 実施例1~3、5、及び15の比較から、第1アニオンの多環の脂環構造が、アダマンタン構造又はアダマンタノン構造である場合、本発明の効果がより優れることが確認された。
 上述のアルカリ水溶液現像により形成したパターン2についても、パターン1と同等の結果が得られた。
 
It was confirmed from the results in Tables 3 and 4 that the resist composition of the present invention was capable of forming a resist pattern with small LWR.
From a comparison between Examples 1 to 3 and 5, it was confirmed that the effect of the present invention is more excellent when the volume of the first anion is 200 Å 3 or less.
From a comparison between Examples 1 and 6 to 9, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the ClogP value of the first cation is 5.00 or more.
From a comparison between Examples 1 and 10 to 13, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention were more excellent when the content of the first acid diffusion controller was 15 mass % or less based on the total solid content of the resist composition.
From a comparison of Examples 1, 4, and 13 to 17, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when at least one selected from the first acid diffusion controller and the second acid diffusion controller has a fluorine atom.
From the comparison of Examples 1 to 3, 5, and 15, it was confirmed that the effects of the present invention are more excellent when the polycyclic alicyclic structure of the first anion is an adamantane structure or an adamantanone structure.
For pattern 2 formed by the above-mentioned aqueous alkaline solution development, the same results as for pattern 1 were obtained.

Claims (9)

  1.  酸の作用により極性が増大する樹脂と、
     アニオンとカチオンとからなり、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって酸を発生する光酸発生剤と、
     第1アニオンと第1カチオンとからなる第1酸拡散制御剤と、
     第2アニオンと第2カチオンとからなる第2酸拡散制御剤と、を含み、
     前記光酸発生剤中の前記カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Aが、前記第1酸拡散制御剤の前記第1カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数B、及び前記第2酸拡散制御剤の前記第2カチオンをプロトンに置き換えてなる酸性化合物の酸解離定数Cのいずれよりも小さく、
     前記第1アニオンが置換基を有していてもよい多環の脂環構造を有し、前記多環の脂環構造を構成するメチレン基は-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよく、前記多環の脂環構造を構成するエチレン基はビニレン基で置換されていてもよく、前記多環の脂環構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、
     前記第1アニオンのClogP値が-1.50以下であり、
     前記第2アニオンの体積が前記第1アニオンの体積よりも大きく、
     前記第2アニオンの体積が250Å以上である、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    A resin whose polarity increases under the action of an acid;
    a photoacid generator which comprises an anion and a cation and generates an acid when exposed to actinic rays or radiation;
    a first acid diffusion controller comprising a first anion and a first cation;
    a second acid diffusion control agent comprising a second anion and a second cation;
    an acid dissociation constant A of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the cation in the photoacid generator with a proton is smaller than both an acid dissociation constant B of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the first cation in the first acid diffusion controller with a proton and an acid dissociation constant C of an acidic compound obtained by replacing the second cation in the second acid diffusion controller with a proton,
    the first anion has a polycyclic alicyclic structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -, an ethylene group constituting the polycyclic alicyclic structure may be substituted with a vinylene group, and when the polycyclic alicyclic structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring;
    the first anion has a ClogP value of −1.50 or less;
    the volume of the second anion is greater than the volume of the first anion;
    the second anion has a volume of 250 Å3 or more.
  2.  前記第1アニオンが、置換基を有していてもよいアダマンタン構造を有し、前記アダマンタン構造を構成するメチレン基は-O-、-CO-、-S-、又は-SO-で置換されていてもよく、前記アダマンタン構造を構成するエチレン基はビニレン基で置換されていてもよく、前記アダマンタン構造が複数の置換基を有する場合、2つの置換基同士は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 2. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the first anion has an adamantane structure which may have a substituent, a methylene group constituting the adamantane structure may be substituted with -O-, -CO-, -S-, or -SO 2 -, an ethylene group constituting the adamantane structure may be substituted with a vinylene group, and when the adamantane structure has a plurality of substituents, two of the substituents may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  3.  前記第1アニオンの体積が、200Å以下である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 2. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the first anion has a volume of 200 Å3 or less.
  4.  前記第1カチオンのClogP値が、5.00以上である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the ClogP value of the first cation is 5.00 or more.
  5.  前記第1酸拡散制御剤の含有量が、前記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分に対して、15質量%以下である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the content of the first acid diffusion control agent is 15 mass% or less based on the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  6.  前記第1酸拡散制御剤及び前記第2酸拡散制御剤の少なくとも1つが、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first acid diffusion control agent and the second acid diffusion control agent contains at least one selected from the group consisting of fluorine atoms and iodine atoms.
  7.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成された、レジスト膜。 A resist film formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  8.  請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程1と、
     前記レジスト膜を露光する工程2と、
     現像液を用いて、前記露光されたレジスト膜を現像して、レジストパターンを得る工程3と、を有する、パターン形成方法。
    A step 1 of forming a resist film on a substrate using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6;
    a step 2 of exposing the resist film;
    and step 3 of developing the exposed resist film with a developer to obtain a resist pattern.
  9.  請求項8に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing an electronic device, comprising the pattern formation method according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2023/034808 2022-10-12 2023-09-26 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern-forming method, and electronic device production method WO2024080128A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-164190 2022-10-12
JP2022164190 2022-10-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024080128A1 true WO2024080128A1 (en) 2024-04-18

Family

ID=90669067

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/034808 WO2024080128A1 (en) 2022-10-12 2023-09-26 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern-forming method, and electronic device production method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024080128A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010119910A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2010-10-21 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, polymer used therein, and compound used therein
WO2014188762A1 (en) * 2013-05-24 2014-11-27 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist pattern forming method, acid diffusion control agent, compound and method for producing compound
WO2020158313A1 (en) * 2019-01-28 2020-08-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010119910A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2010-10-21 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, polymer used therein, and compound used therein
WO2014188762A1 (en) * 2013-05-24 2014-11-27 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist pattern forming method, acid diffusion control agent, compound and method for producing compound
WO2020158313A1 (en) * 2019-01-28 2020-08-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7318129B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7454669B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2019123895A1 (en) Active-light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, method for manufacturing electronic device, and compound
WO2022209733A1 (en) Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
WO2023286763A1 (en) Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2023286764A1 (en) Pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and resist film
WO2022172689A1 (en) Active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
TW201506997A (en) Pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method and electronic device
WO2021220851A1 (en) Active light ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, mask blank, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
JP7434592B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023145564A1 (en) Active light–sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light–sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and production method for electronic device
WO2023054127A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023032794A1 (en) Actinic ray sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, actinic ray sensitive or radiation sensitive film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method, and compound
WO2022186059A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
WO2022158323A1 (en) Pattern formation method and method for producing electronic device
WO2022024929A1 (en) Active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
KR102503368B1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method
TW201809883A (en) Method for forming negative resist pattern, and method for manufacturing electronic device
WO2024080128A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern-forming method, and electronic device production method
WO2024106130A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device production method
WO2022215423A1 (en) Active-light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, electronic device production method, polymerizable compound, and resin
JP7301123B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition production method, pattern formation method, electronic device production method
WO2023157635A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, method for producing electronic device, and compound
WO2023120250A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method, and compound
WO2022202345A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23877134

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1